quadramed cpr patient identification expand … · quadramed® cpr patient identification expand...

QuadraMed® CPRPatient Identification XP Screen

Table Reference

Client Support

Government Program Support

WarningThe laboratory information system module of the QuadraMed CPR (QCPR) product is not designed for, nor is it intended for use in, a blood banking establishment. QuadraMed does not support, and disclaims any liability for, any use of the QCPR product for such purpose. This means that the intended use of QCPR does not include any blood banking functions whatsoever, which functions include by way of example, but are in no way limited to, the following:

Documentation – Including pre-transfusion testing (i.e., readings), outcome of testing (i.e., interpretations), transfusion of blood products, computer assisted evaluation of data, and unit number and blood type as they relate to any of the above documentations.

Inventory tracking units

Labels for blood products

Converting antibody/transfusion history card information

Donor processing

In no event will QuadraMed or any person or company acting on its behalf be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, loss (including, without limitation, loss of profit), or personal injury arising from the supply or use of QCPR to perform the above mentioned or any other blood banking functions or to support a blood banking establishment, or arising from the supply or use of any accompanying hardware and written materials for the purposes of supporting the above mentioned or any other blood banking functions.

Any questions regarding the use of QCPR should be directed to QCPR Customer Support.

QuadraMed Corporation Proprietary StatementThis material constitutes proprietary and trade secret information of the QuadraMed Corporation, and shall not be disclosed to any third party, nor used by the recipient except under the terms and conditions prescribed by the QuadraMed Corporation.

The trademarks, service marks, and logos of QuadraMed Corporation and others used herein are the property of QuadraMed or their respective owners.

QuadraMed Corporation Copyright StatementThis material is also protected by Federal Copyright Law and is not to be copied or reproduced in any form, using any medium, without the prior written authorization of the QuadraMed Corporation. However, the QuadraMed Corporation allows the printing of the Adobe Acrobat PDF files for the purposes of client training and reference.

Contents copyright © 2011 QuadraMed Corporation. All rights reserved.

Phone: 877.823.7263

E-Mail: [email protected]

Technical Support:

Phone: 800.257.0512


Application Training Support:

Phone: 800.257.0512


Software and PDFs of guides and other documentation are available for download on the client support website. CDs and printed materials are available for purchase. See http://www.quadramed.com/customer_service for more information.

QuadraMed Corporation iii

Revision List

The following list provides the most current revision number and date for each chapter in this manual.

CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER

DATE

01 - Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”) 6.3.11 3/00

02 - Room/Bed Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

03 - Unit Lookup Type 4.3.0 7/05

04 - All Patient Alpha Lookup Type 4.3.0 7/05

05 - Visit Alpha Lookup Type 4.3.0 7/05

06 - Physician Alpha Lookup Type 4.1.0 5/04

07 - Physician Location Lookup Type 4.1.0 5/04

08 - Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type 4.1.0 5/04

09 - Service Alpha Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

10 - Service Location Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

11 - Religion Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

12 - Resident Service Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

13 - Visit with Bed Activation Time Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

14 - Management Queue: Overview 6.4.2 01/01

15 - Management Queue, Event Object Type 6.3.12 6/00

16 - Management Queue, Insurance Object Type 6.4.1 10/00

17 - Management Queue, Order Object Type 6.4.1 10/00

18 - Management Queue, Patient Object Type 6.4.1 10/00

19 - Management Queue, Visit Object Type 6.4.2 1/01

QuadraMed® CPR Patient Identification Expand Screen Table Reference

iv QuadraMed Corporation

20 - Management Queue, Visit Location Object Type 6.4.2 1/01

21 - Staff Assignment Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

22 - Resource Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

23 - Visit Location Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

24 - Interim Location Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

25 - Current Location Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

26 - Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

27 - Care Provider Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

28 - Lifecare Visit Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

29 - Physician Triage Level Lookup Type 6.3.11 3/00

CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER

DATE

Copyright © 2011 QuadraMed Corporation

Table of Contents

Revision List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Chapter 1 Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id")

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Selection Screen Name Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Selection Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Alias Name(s)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Chapter 2 Room/Bed Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14


vi QuadraMed Corporation

Chapter 3 Unit Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Unit Location Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Unit Location Screen Processing (Javaview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Patient List Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Navigation in the Patient List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 4 All Patient Alpha Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Patient Identification Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Adaptation for Bar Code Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Non-matching Number Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Column Header Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Processing Multiple Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Suppress Deceased?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Check Assignment? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Physician(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Display Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation vii

Inter-Fac Visit Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Default Barcode Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 5 Visit Alpha Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Non-matching Number Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Availability of Barcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Processing Multiple Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Default Barcode Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 6 Physician Alpha Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Lookup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Patient Identification (Javaview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Patient List Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Discharge Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Only Patients In Beds?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Display Lifecare Patients? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74


viii QuadraMed Corporation

Patient Access Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Visit Type/Status List (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76PTID Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Allow Signout/Reassign? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Disable Coverage Edits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Split Action Item Counts?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Chapter 7 Physician Location Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Lookup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Patient Identification (Javaview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Patient List Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Discharge Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Only Patients In Beds? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Display Lifecare Patients? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Patient Access Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102PTID Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Allow Signout/Reassign? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Disable Coverage Edits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Split Action Item Counts?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 8 Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Lookup Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Patient Identification (Javaview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Patient List Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation ix

Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Discharge Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Only Patients In Beds?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Display Lifecare Patients? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Patient Access Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129PTID Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Allow Signout/Reassign? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Disable Coverage Edits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Split Action Item Counts?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Chapter 9 Service Alpha Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Chapter 10 Service Location Lookup Type



x QuadraMed Corporation

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Chapter 11 Religion Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Religion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Chapter 12 Resident Service Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Resident Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Resident Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation xi

Chapter 13 Visit w/Bed Activation Time Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Allowable Visit Type(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Chapter 14 Management Queue: Overview

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Event Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Insurance Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Order Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Order Authorization Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174On-line and Manual Authorizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Patient Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Visit Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Visit Location Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 15 Mgmt Q: Event Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Event:Department Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Event:Patient Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Event:Specimen Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Management Queue Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186


xii QuadraMed Corporation

Management Queue Expand Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Management Queue Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Chapter 16 Mgmt Q: Insurance Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Insurance:Discharge Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Insurance:Discharge Time Order by Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Insurance:Home Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Insurance:Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Insurance:Patient Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Insurance:Preadmit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Insurance:Preadmit Time Order by Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Insurance:Review Agency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Insurance:Visit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Insurance:Visit Time Order by Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Management Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Management Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222List/Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation xiii

Home Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Chapter 17 Mgmt Q: Order Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Order Authorization Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227On-line and Manual Authorizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Order: Authorization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Order:Order Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Order:Order Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Order:Patient Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Order: Primary Insurance, Benefit Plan Order Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Order: Primary Insurance, Order Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Order: Primary Visit Location, Order Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Management Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Management Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246List/Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Insurance/Benefit Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Insurances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250


xiv QuadraMed Corporation

Chapter 18 Mgmt Q: Patient Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Patient:Patient Alpha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Management Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Management Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Chapter 19 Mgmt Q: Visit Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Abstracting Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Visit:Discharge Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Visit:Discharge Time Order by Day. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Visit:Home Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Visit:Home Location Management Queue Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Visit:Medical Record Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Visit:Patient Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Visit:Preadmit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Visit:Preadmit Time Order by Day. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Visit:Primary Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Visit:Triage Acuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation xv

Visit time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Patient alpha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Visit:Visit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Visit:Visit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Visit:Visit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Visit:Visit Time Order by Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Visit:Visit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Management Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Management Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300List/Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Home Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Insurances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Chapter 20 Mgmt Q: Visit Location Object Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Visit Location:Primary Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Visit Location:Primary Insurance, Review Agency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Visit Location:Visit Location Patient Alpha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Visit Location: Visit Location Time Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Management Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Management Queue Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321


xvi QuadraMed Corporation

Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Management Group/Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323List/Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Insurances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Visit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Phys Assignment Prompt?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Chapter 21 Staff Assignment Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Employee Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Work Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Chapter 22 Resource Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Resource(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation xvii

Chapter 23 Visit Location Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Location(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Chapter 24 Interim Location Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Interim Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Expand Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 25 Current Location Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362


xviii QuadraMed Corporation

Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Location(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Allow Selection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Allow Processing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Expand Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Chapter 26 Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Patient Access Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378PTID Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Physician Follow-Up Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Allow Summary Review Accept? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Allow Summary Sign Accept? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Use Patient Review Queues? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Confidential Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Physician Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Redirect Employee Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Redirect Security Employee Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Require Reject Reason . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Order Reject Reason Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Chapter 27 Care Provider Lookup Type

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Table Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Table Builder Definition Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Table of Contents

QuadraMed Corporation xix

Selection Screen Line Definition Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Suppress Deceased?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Chapter 28 Lifecare Visit Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Display Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Chapter 29 Physician Triage Level Lookup Type


Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Patient Screen Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Primary Lookup Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Discharge Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Only Patients In Beds?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Display Lifecare Patients? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Partial Name Search? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Patient Access Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411PTID Visit Type/Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Physician Assignment Prompt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414


xx QuadraMed Corporation

Allow Signout/Reassign? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Index of Selected Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

QuadraMed Corporation 1

Chapter 1

Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id")

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id"), is used to define patient identification selection lists that can be accessed by clicking Expand during patient identification. Each selection list contains options that identify specific populations (i.e., subsets) of patients by using search criteria (Example: All inpatients, all patients on LOA, or inpatients by religion).

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt("id"):

AccessioningCharge Entry RandomCharge Entry SingleDepartment Order Review QueueDepartment ProcessorFilm/Chart Batch Request/CheckoutFilm/Chart Interim LocationManagement Queue HistoryPatient Product Ordering/EditPatient IdentificationPatient Product Supply EditPhysician ProcessorPhysician Review QueuePrescription RefillResource Schedule Manager


2 QuadraMed Corporation

Resource Schedule Time FirstResource Schedule Wait ListResult Entry (Equiv Results w/ Selection)Result Entry (Equiv Results)Result Entry (Specimen First)Solution Check QueueSolution Preparation QueueSolution Release QueueStaff Assignment QueueStaff Queue Assignment By Employee

Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt("id"):Applications User Profile Table, ^ap

Facility Specific? Yes

Table Organization The Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id"), is a multiple-level table. It is composed of the following levels: Selection Screen Name and Selection Screen Line Definition.

Once this table is accessed, the System prompts for a partial name. After a partial name has been entered, the System displays a list of previously defined Selection Screen Options, if any.

Selecting an option to edit displays the information for the Selection Screen Name level. This information can be edited by clicking Edit Current Level or the Selection Screen Line Definition level can be accessed by clicking Continue To Sub-Level.

When adding a new option, the information for the Selection Screen Name level must be defined and accepted before the information for the Selection Screen Line Definition level can be accessed.

After the Selection Screen Name level is defined, the System displays the Selection Screen Line Definition level. An option can be selected to edit or the following processing options are available:

Change Column Display – Allows the column display to be changed. Initially, when a selection screen is accessed, the System displays the selection screen in three columns across the screen.

This processing option allows the column display to be changed from one to nine columns. Clicking Change Column Display causes the System to prompt for the number of columns to display in the list editor. A number from 1 to 9 can be entered. The System defaults to the previously entered number is entered, the System redisplays the selection screen in the specified number of columns.

Delete – Allows an option to be removed from the list. Clicking Delete causes the System to prompt for the number(s) of the item(s) to delete. When an item number(s) is entered, the System highlights the entry and asks for verification to delete the item(s). Once verified, the system deletes the item(s) from the list and redisplays the list minus the deleted item(s).



Table Builder Definition ScreenThe following Table Builder Definition Screens display:

Selection Screen Name Level (see page 4)

Selection Screen Line Definition Level (see page 5)

Edit Screen Heading – Allows the screen heading to be created or edited. The screen heading displays in the upper left-hand corner of the list display in underlined text. This text should always end with the word Options (Example: Physician Patient Identification Options).

Insert – Allows a new option to be inserted into any position on the list. Clicking Insert causes the System to prompt for the location to which the option is to be inserted. The option can be placed before an already existing option or at the end of the list. The System defaults to end. For example, when the new option is inserted before option number 3, the new option becomes option number 3, option number 3 becomes option number 4, and so forth.

Move – Allows an option(s) to be moved to any location on the list. Clicking Move causes the System to prompt for an option(s) to move. When an option(s) is selected, the System prompts for the location to which the option(s) is to be moved.

The option can be placed before an already existing option or at the end of the list. Once a location is specified, the System inserts the option(s) at the specified location. When multiple options are selected to move, the System places the options in the specified location in the order in which they were selected.

Sort – Allows a specified range of options to be sorted by display text in ASCII sequence. Clicking Sort causes the System to prompt for the options to sort or click All.

View Actual Display – Allows the selection screen to be viewed in display windows of various sizes. By viewing the selection screen, the display text and option display order can be adjusted to create a list that displays properly on the user side.

Clicking View Actual Display causes the System to prompt for a window size. Once the window size is defined, the System displays the selection screen in the window of the selected size.

The maximum window size is 19 lines. Most selection screens display in windows of 10 to 15 lines. The first line of the window always contains the screen heading.

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments use patient identification selection screens to access certain patients/visits in performing their duties.

When sorting, the System treats headings and subheadings as regular text. If you click All, headings and subheadings will not be placed above the appropriate text.



Selection Screen Name LevelThe following fields display on the Table Builder Definition Screen:

Selection Name

Purpose Identifies the name of the expand screen.

Input Free-text

100 character limit, although greater than 50 is impractical for display purposes.

Required

System Use Displays for selection in the Expand Menu or PTID Expand Menu push parameter in various menu functions with embedded patient identification, as in the following menu functions:

AccessioningCharge Entry RandomCharge Entry SingleDepartment Order Review QueueDepartment ProcessorFilm/Chart Batch Request/CheckoutFilm/Chart Interim LocationManagement Queue HistoryPatient Product Ordering/EditPatient IdentificationPatient Product Supply EditPhysician ProcessorPhysician Review QueuePrescription RefillResource Schedule ManagerResource Schedule Time FirstResource Schedule Wait ListResult Entry (Equiv Results w/ Selection)Result Entry (Equiv Results)Result Entry (Specimen First)Solution Check QueueSolution Preparation QueueSolution Release QueueStaff Assignment QueueStaff Queue Assignment By Employee

Displays for selection in the Applications User Profile Table, ^ap Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Processor Expand Screen field.

Impact ofChange

Edits and additions are effective immediately.



Selection Screen Line Definition LevelThe following fields display on the Table Builder Definition Screen for the Selection Screen Line Definition level:

Alias Name(s))

Purpose Identifies a different name(s) by which this expand screen can be accessed.

Input Add/Delete Editor

Free-text

Greater than 50 characters is impractical for display purposes

System Use Determines alternative names for the expand screen. As a guideline, the Selection Name field should be used for the formal name and this field should be used for common names, abbreviations, or acronyms.

Impact ofChange


Line Type

Purpose Defines the item or line that creates the information that displays on the selection screen.

Input Heading

Subheading

Option

Defaults to option

Required

System Use Heading – Allows a heading to display on the selection screen. Headings organize the selection screen into categories. They display centered, in dim, reverse text and extend the length of the display column. Headings cannot be selected on the user side.

Subheading – Allows a subheading to display on the selection screen. Subheadings divide headings into more specific categories. They display centered, in dim, underlined text in the display column. Subheadings cannot be selected on the user side.

Option – Allows an option to display on the selection screen. Options provide a way of looking up patients through various categories. Causes the Data field to display for definition. Options are selectable on the user side. They display in bright text in this table and on the user side.

Impact ofChange




Display Text

Purpose Defines the actual text that displays on the selection screen.

Input Free-text

Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes.

Required

System Use Displays this text as a heading, subheading, or patient identification lookup option on the selection screen. When text is longer than display area, the System truncates when necessary and adds an ellipsis (…).

Impact ofChange


Data

Purpose Defines the lookup method used when the option is selected. This field displays only when the Line Type field is defined as option.

Input Displays the following subfields for definition:

Patient Screen TitlePrimary Lookup Type

Defaults to not defined

Required

System Use Determines the patient identification method used when an option is selected from the selection screen.

Impact ofChange


Patient Screen Title

Purpose Defines the heading that displays when a patient is identified using this lookup type.

Input Free-text


Required

System Use Displays this screen heading above the data that matches the search criteria. For example, when this subfield is defined as Patients for, and the search criteria entered by the user is Smith, the heading displays as Patients for SMITH.

Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when an option is selected from the expand screen.



Input Single selection from the following hard-coded options:

Room/bed

Unit

All patient alpha

Visit alpha

Physician alpha

Physician location

Physician alpha/location

Service alpha

Service location

Religion alpha

Resident service

Visit with bed by activation time

Management queue

Staff assignment

Resource

Visit location

Interim location

Current location

Physician alpha/time

Care Provider

Lifecare visit

Physician triage level

Required

System Use Room/bed – Displays the patients in a specified room/bed location. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 2, Room/Bed Lookup Type.

Unit – Displays the patients on a specific nursing unit. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 3, Unit Lookup Type.

All patient alpha – Displays all patients defined in the database. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 4, All Patient Alpha Lookup Type.

Visit alpha – Displays the patients who have a specified visit type and status. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 5, Visit Alpha Lookup Type.

Physician alpha – Displays the patients for a specific physician. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 6, Physician Alpha Lookup Type.

Physician location – Displays the patients for a specific physician in location order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 7, Physician Location Lookup Type.

Primary Lookup Type (Continued)



Physician alpha/location – Displays the patients for a specific physician in either alphabetical or location order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 8, Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type.

Service alpha – Displays the patients defined for a specified service. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 9, Service Alpha Lookup Type.

Service location – Displays the patients defined for a specified service in location order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 10, Service Location Lookup Type.

Religion alpha – Displays the patients defined for a specified religion. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 11, Religion Lookup Type.

Resident service – Displays the patients under the care of a specified resident service. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 12, Resident Service Lookup Type.

Visit with bed by activation time – Displays the patients with their bed and visit activation time. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 13, Visit w/Bed Activation Time Lookup Type.

Management queue – Displays the patients included in a specified management queue. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 14, Management Queue: Overview.

Staff assignment – Displays the patients assigned to a specific employee/provider. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 21, Staff Assignment Lookup Type.

Resource – Displays the patients scheduled for a specified resource for the current date. The patients display in chronological order based on the scheduled event time. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 22, Resource Lookup Type.

Visit location – Displays the patients whose visits are associated with a specified location. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 23, Visit Location Lookup Type.

Interim location – Displays an alphabetical list of patient charts within a specified temporary department location. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 24, Interim Location Lookup Type.

Current location – Displays patients checked into a temporary location (Example: radiology, surgery). For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 25, Current Location Lookup Type.

Physician alpha/time – Displays the scheduled appointments for the current day for a specific physician. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 26, Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type.

Care provider – Displays the patients for a specific care provider. The patients display in alphabetical order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 27, Care Provider Lookup Type.

Lifecare visit – Displays the lifecare visit data for selected patient. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 28, Lifecare Visit Lookup Type.

Physician triage level – Displays the patients assigned to a specific physician. The patients display in triage order. For a complete description of this lookup type, refer to Chapter 29, Physician Triage Level Lookup Type.

Impact ofChange




Chapter 2

Room/Bed Lookup Type

OverviewThe room/bed lookup type is used to identify a patient by a room/bed location. Room/bed locations are defined in the Area Table, âfa.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Room/Bed Lookup Type:

Any menu function with embedded patient identification containing an Expand Menu or PTID Expand Menu push parameter (Example: Accessioning, Bed Swap, Department Order Review Queue)

Patient IdentificationPatient List

Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Room/Bed Lookup Type:

Desktop Application Table, ât(“dta”)

Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Room/Bed Lookup Type:

Area Table, âfa

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments can use the room/bed lookup type to identify a patient assigned to a particular bed.

NursingNurses use the room/bed lookup type to identify a patient when documenting results at the bedside.

PhysiciansPhysicians use the room/bed lookup type to identify a patient assigned to a particular bed or when looking at results or documenting results at the bedside.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Location subfield of this table is defined. The Location subfield can be defined as follows:

Ask User – Prompts the user to enter a location (Example: A nursing unit or a room/bed). The System defaults to the location of the terminal if defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field. If the user wishes to access a different location, the Expand button can be clicked. Clicking Expand displays a list of unit locations for selection.

Unit Location – Displays a list of patients in a room location on the specified unit.

Room Location – Displays the Bedside Display Screen for the patient(s) in the specified room. The Bedside Display Screen displays only when the specified room consists of one or two beds (that is, sub-areas or sub-sub-areas). The Bedside Display Screen is shown in the figure below:

A unit location can be defined only when the Area Table, ^afa, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level option, Lookup Flags field, Bed? subfield is defined as yes. In this case the System displays only those sub-area locations defined as beds.



When the room is defined with more than two beds, the System displays a list of occupied beds for selection, bypassing the Bedside Display Screen as shown in the figure above. The data that displays on the Bedside Display Screen is created in the Face Sheet Table, ^ nt("fs"), Bedside Screen Display subfile.The following information displays on the Bedside Display Screen:

Bed – Displays the name of the bed.

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The format of the patient name depends on how the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field is defined. Patient names are truncated when necessary.

Sex – Displays the sex of the patient.

Age – Displays the age of the patient based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^ %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Max Age In Days and Max Age In Months fields.

Additional Information – Displays patient-related information. This information is defined in the Face Sheet Table, ^ nt("fs"), Bedside Screen Display subfile. This information is used to display patient status data, such as diet status, CPR status, physician, and so on.



Table Builder Definition ScreenThe following Table Builder Definition Screen displays:


Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required

System Use (H) Heading – Allows a heading to display on the selection screen. Headings organize the selection screen into categories. They display centered, in dim, reverse text and extend the length of the display column. Headings cannot be selected on the user side.

(S) Subheading – Allows a subheading to display on the selection screen. Subheadings divide headings into more specific categories. They display centered, in dim, underlined text in the display column. Subheadings cannot be selected on the user side.

(O) Option – Allows an option to display on the selection screen. Options provide a way of looking up patients through various categories.

Causes the Data field to display for definition. Options are selectable on the user side. They display in bright text in this table and on the user side.

Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data

Purpose Defines the lookup method used when the option is selected. This field displays for definition only when the Line Type field is defined as option.




Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as room/bed, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a specified room/bed.

Input Defining this subfield as room/bed causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

LocationPhysician Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified room/bed.

Impact ofChange

Edits are effective immediately.

Location

Purpose Defines the location or room used to determine the patients who display during a patient search.



Input Location look-up name

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area Name field.

Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, an active bed defined at either the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.

(C) Currently Selected Location(T) Terminal Location(U) Ask User

Defaults to Ask user

System Use Determines the screen that displays when this option is selected to search for patients.

(T) Terminal Location – Displays the patients in the location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts for a location when a patient search is performed using this lookup type option.

(C) Currently Selected Location – Allows the user to define this field using the location level initially entered, rather than selecting a lower level. For example, a user might initially enter the location 5 North, causing the System to display the room numbers 5101 and 5102. Clicking (C) Currently Selected Location defines this field as 5 North.

Impact ofChange


Physician Assignment Prompt?

Purpose Defines whether the System prompts a physician to assign him/herself to a patient when identifying a patient using this lookup type.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to No

System Use Yes – Indicates the System prompts the physician to assign him/herself to the patient once the patient is selected from the patient list. The prompt displays when both of the following conditions are true:

The physician accessing the patient does not have a current assignment to the patient.

The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are linked to a provider in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

No – Indicates the System does not display the physician assignment prompt.

Impact ofChange


Location


Chapter 3

Unit Lookup Type

OverviewThe unit lookup type is used to display a list of patient visits associated with a home location on a specific nursing unit. Locations are defined in the Area Table, âfa.

Table Attributes

Lookup types defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id"), can be customized for display in the Patient Identification menu function and in the QuadraMed Computerized Patient Records (QCPR) Clinical Desktop, Patient List application. Lookup types defined in this table, can be accessed in the Patient Identification menu function by clicking Expand from the initial patient identification method. In the Patient List application, lookup types defined in this table are used to identify a patient. The following description describes only a portion of these functions.

Table Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt("id"), Unit Lookup Type:

Any menu function with embedded patient identification containing an Expand Menu or PTID Expand Menu push parameter (For Example: Accessioning, Bed Swap, Department Order Review Queue, and so on)

Patient Identification

Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt("id"), Unit Lookup Type:

Desktop Application Table, ât("dta")

Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt (“id”), Unit Lookup Type:

Area Table, âfa

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments can use the Unit lookup type to identify a patient(s) in a particular unit.



DescriptionThis section provides a general description of the menu functions and screens for unit lookup type.

Patient Identification menu function (Javaview) – When a unit lookup type option is selected to identify a patient from the Patient Identification menu function (Javaview), Expand button, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Location subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Location subfield can be defined as follows:

Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to enter a unit location lookup name (For Example: 5N, 4S, and so on). The Unit Lookup Type (Ask User) screen is shown below. The System defaults to the location of the terminal if the unit location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

The entered name must match the name defined in the Area Table, âfa, Look-up Name(s) field, although upper or lower case may be entered on the transaction line.

In order for the area option to be selected, an active bed defined at either the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes. Clicking Expand causes the System to display a list of unit locations to select as shown in the Location Expand Screen below.

Users can enter a unit location name in the transaction line and click OK or click Expand and select from the Location Expand Screen as shown below.



Terminal Location – Displays the patients assigned to the location for the terminal. The terminal is defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field. If a location is not defined for the terminal, an error message displays.

Clicking OK allows the user to select a different Patient Identification Option. The Patient Identification Options Screen is defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id").

Unit Location – Displays the Unit Location screen for a specific unit. This screen displays a list of bed locations for the unit. The unit location is defined in the Data field, Location subfield of this table. The Unit Location screen is shown below:

Select a unit location option and click OK, or double-click to open a unit location screen.



Unit Location ScreenThe Unit Location Screen displays the patients in a specified nursing unit. The display header information is dependent on how the lookup type is defined. See the figure above. The following information displays for each patient:

Location – Displays the patient's home location, including defined overflow beds.

Status – Displays the status of the bed, the patient's current location, or pending movement. The information that displays in this column depends on the status of the bed. The following bed statuses can display:

HK (Housekeeping) – Indicates the bed is in the housekeeping queue and needs to be cleaned.

HOLD – Indicates a hold has been placed on the bed in the Bed Control menu function. The hold comment entered in the Bed Control menu function displays in the Name column. This bed status displays in dim text.

IN <Location> – Indicates the patient has been transported to the specified location (For Example: IN Rad).

LOA/INT – Indicates the patient is on a leave of absence or visit interrupt.

OCC (Occupied) – Indicates the bed is occupied.

The Visit column displays the visit type when the patient has an active visit.

NOTE: The header name for this column is intentionally left blank only in PTID Javaview.



OUT (Out of Service) – Indicates the bed has been placed out of service. The reason for the removal of the bed also displays (For Example: Remodeling). This bed status displays in dim text.

PD (Pending Discharge) – Indicates the patient has an active discharge order. Displays the date/time the discharge is scheduled.

PT (Pending Transfer) – Indicates the patient has an active transfer order. Displays the date/time the transfer is scheduled.

RV (Reserved) – Indicates the bed has been reserved for a patient. The information for this patient displays in dim text. Displays the date/time of the bed request (For Example: visit date/time).

TO (Transfer Out) – Indicates the patient has been temporarily transferred to a virtual (unregistered) unit/bed (For Example: ICU). The System displays the registered bed for insurance authorization purposes, a well as the temporary bed. This bed status displays in dim text.

Visit (header name intentionally left blank in Javaview) – Displays the two-letter visit type when the patient has an active visit (For Example: CP, EP, IP, OP, SP).

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The format of the patient name depends on how the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Last/First Name Delimiter field is defined. Patient names are truncated when necessary.

Number – Displays the patient's medical record number. The number format is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen.

Sex – Displays the gender of the patient.

Age – Displays the age of the patient. The patient's age displays based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Max Age In Days and Max Age In Months fields.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's responsible physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Unit Location Screen Processing (Javaview)A patient can be selected by double clicking the patient's name or single click to highlight the patient and then click OK to select it. Once a patient is selected, the System displays either the associated menu function or menu list, or the Object/Visit desktop for the patient from which the user can select an application/menu function.



When the Data field, Physician Assignment Prompt? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, and the user is a physician who does not have a current assignment for the patient, the System prompts Are you taking responsibility for this patient? This prompt displays only when the following occurs:


The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet("etc"), Facility-specific, Physicians and Residents Employee Type Category Option, Employee Type(s) field. Employee Types are defined for an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

The Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt can be answered as follows:

(Y) Yes – Clicking this option prompts the physician to select a medical service option, if any. Medical service options are defined in the Physician Service/Department/Specialty Table, âet("ps"), and linked to a physician in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Specialty(s) field. Once the medical service is selected, the System places the physician's name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician's list.

When the physician accessing the patient is a resident (that is, employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet("etc"), Residents employee type category option), the System places the resident's name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Resident(s) field and adds the patient to the resident's list.

(N) No – Clicking (N) No displays the menu function, menu list, or Object/Visit desktop for the patient. The System defaults to no when the user bypasses the prompt and clicks OK.

The following additional options are available:

Back – (or Cancel in Ultiview) Returns the user to the patient identification screen.

Cancel – Prompts the user to end this screen display. If the user clicks (Y) Yes the System closes the Unit Location Screen and returns the user to the Main desktop. If the user clicks (N) No, the System returns to the patient identification screen.

Residents are not added to the Attending field from this assignment prompt.

This functionality is used only in the Patient Identification menu function and does not affect the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application.



Patient List ApplicationWhen the user accesses the Patient List application on the QuadraMed CPR Clinical Desktop, the initial patient identification option that displays is defined in the Standard Desktop Configuration Table, ât("dt"), Main Desktop Configuration subfile, Desktop Blocks sub-subfile, Applications field, Facility Preferences subfield, Initial Patient Identification Option sub-subfield. The Patient List application uses the patient identification option screens defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ̂ rt("id"), to display the Navigator Menu structure.

The definition of the Data field, Location subfield of the Unit lookup type can determine the manner in which a patient can be identified in the Patient List application. The Data field, Location subfield can be defined as follows:

Ask User – Displays a drop-down box as shown below from which the user can select a nursing unit location. When the user clicks on a unit location, the System displays the Unit Location Screen for that unit as shown below. Unit locations are defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

Terminal Location – Displays the patients assigned to the location of the terminal as shown below. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. When the terminal location results in no patients or no location is defined, a No Patients Found message displays centered in the empty patient list area.

Unit Location – Displays the patients for the specified nursing unit as shown below. This screen displays a list of room/bed locations on the unit defined in the Data field, Location subfield of this table. The System displays a drop-down box from which the user can select a different unit location.

To allow flexible database configuration, the Initial Patient Identification Option subfield exists in the Desktop Application Table, ât("dta"), and the Standard Desktop Configuration Table, ât("dt"). It is recommended to define the Initial Patient Identification Option subfield in the Standard Desktop Configuration Table, ât("dt"), and leave it blank in the Desktop Application Table, ât("dta"). When a field has been defined in the Standard Desktop Configuration Table, ât("dt"), it has the ability to be added or deleted using the configuration/user preference capability.

This document does not include an explanation of the entire process for defining the Patient List application database. For a complete description of this application, refer to Chapter 14, Patient List in the Clinical Desktop Applications Reference.



Navigator drop-down menu Clicking the down-arrow in the Unit drop-down box displays additional unit locations.

Initial default PTID option



The following columns display on the Patient List - Unit Location Screen as shown below:

Location – Displays the patient's home location.

Status – Displays the status of the bed, the patient's current location, or pending movement. The information that displays in this column depends on the status of the bed. The following bed statuses can display:

HK (Housekeeping) – Indicates the bed is in the housekeeping queue and needs to be cleaned.

HOLD – Indicates a hold has been placed on the bed in the Bed Control menu function. The hold comment entered in the Bed Control menu function displays in the Name column. This bed status displays in dim text.

IN <Location> – Indicates the patient has been transported to the specified location (For Example: IN Rad).

LOA/INT – Indicates the patient is on a leave of absence or visit interrupt.

OCC (Occupied) – Indicates the bed is occupied.

OUT (Out of Service) – Indicates the bed has been placed out of service. The reason for the removal of the bed also displays (For Example: Remodeling). This bed status displays in dim text.

PD (Pending Discharge) – Indicates the patient has an active discharge order. Displays the date/time the discharge is scheduled.

PT (Pending Transfer) – Indicates the patient has an active transfer order. Displays the date/time the transfer is scheduled.

RV (Reserved) – Indicates the bed has been reserved for a patient. The information for this patient displays in dim text. Displays the date/time of the bed request (For Example: visit date/time).

TO (Transfer Out) – Indicates the patient has been temporarily transferred to a virtual (unregistered) unit/bed (For Example: ICU). The System displays the registered bed for insurance authorization purposes, a well as the temporary bed. This bed status displays in dim text.

Privacy – Displays the privacy requested by the patient during the visit (For Example: limited, full), as defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Flag, Privacy data element.

Type – Displays the two-letter visit type when the patient has an active visit (For Example: EP, IP, OP, CP).

Patient Name – Displays the name of the patient. The format of the patient name depends on how the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Last/First Name Delimiter field is defined.



Number – Displays the patient's medical record number. The number format is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen.

Gender – Displays the gender of the patient.

Age – Displays the age of the patient based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Max Age In Days and Max Age In Months fields.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's responsible physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Patient List

Preview Pane

Goto Patient

Refresh icon

Edit Preferences icon



Navigation in the Patient ListThe Unit lookup type can be changed by clicking the arrow in the Navigator drop-down menu (as shown above on page 21). For example, when the default patient identification option is Unit (ask user), and the user selects another patient identification option, clicking the arrow in the Navigator drop-down menu displays a list of additional lookup type options defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id"), linked to the application (For Example: All Patient Alpha).

Patient List Button – A patient can be selected by double-clicking a patient, or single click to highlight the patient and then click Goto Patient(s). Multiple patients can also be highlighted and selected by clicking goto patient(s).

The user can click Goto Patient(s) from the Patient List Unit Location Screen. Clicking this option displays the Object/Visit desktop for the selected patient(s). This option remains dim (inactive) until a patient(s) is highlighted (as shown above on page 24).

Refreshing the Patient List Screen – The Refresh Icon in the upper right corner of the header bar allows the user to quickly redisplay the screen with the most current information (as shown above on page 24).

Patient List Preview Pane – The Patient List Unit Location Screen can utilize a horizontal split screen format depending on the definition of the Standard Desktop Configuration Table, ^at("dt"), Main Desktop Configuration subfile, Desktop Blocks subfile, Patient List application, Non-Facility Preferences field, Display Patient Preview Pane? subfield.

When the Display Patient Preview Pane? subfield is defined as yes, and a patient is highlighted by a single click, the patient list displays in the upper screen and the Preview Pane of the object desktop for the patient displays in the lower screen (as shown above on page 24).

The user can control the display of the Preview Pane by left-clicking the Patient List Edit Preferences icon in the upper right corner of the Patient List header bar. Left-clicking the icon displays the Preview Pane Edit Box as shown below. Checking the box and clicking OK displays the Preview Pane, while clearing the check and clicking OK disables the Preview Pane. Clicking Cancel leaves the Preview Pane unchanged.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This field should be defined as unit, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a nursing unit.

Input Defining this subfield as unit causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Location


Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified nursing unit.

Impact of Change




Location

Purpose Defines the location that determines which patients display during a unit search.

Input Location look-up name

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Lookup Name field.

Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, an active bed defined at either the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.

(T) Terminal Location

(U) Ask User

Defaults to ask user

System Use Determines the list of patient visits that display when this option is selected to search for patients.

(T) Terminal Location – Indicates the System displays the patients who are assigned to the location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to specify a location when the unit lookup type option is selected to identify a patient.

Impact of Change



Purpose Defines whether the System prompts the physician for assignment when a patient is not assigned to the current user. This subfield displays when the Primary Lookup Type subfield is defined as unit.

NOTE: This functionality is used only in the Patient Identification menu function and does not affect the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays an Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt once a patient not assigned to the current user is identified using this lookup type. The prompt displays only when the following conditions are true:

The user accessing the patient does not have a current assignment to the patient.

The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet("etc"), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/ Provider Table, âe, Employee Type(s) field.

No – Indicates the System does not prompt the user to assign him/herself to the patient.

Impact of Change



Chapter 4

All Patient Alpha Lookup Type

OverviewThe all patient alpha lookup type is used to access any patient defined in the QuadraMed CPR database. This lookup type can also be defined to access patients assigned to a specific physician(s) and allows access to closed visits.

In addition, when this lookup type is utilized, the System provides the ability to scan a barcode without requiring keyboard input of a prefix prior to the scan.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), All Patient Alpha Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), All Patient Alpha Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), All Patient Alpha Lookup Type:

Employee/Provider Table, ^ae

Department Usage Ancillary DepartmentsAll departments can use this lookup type to identify patients as well as patients assigned to a particular physician.

Inter-Facility OfficesOffice personnel use this lookup type to identify patients assigned to a particular physician.

NursingNurses use this lookup type to identify patients as well as patients assigned to a particular physician.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends whether the Data field, Physician(s) subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Physician(s)) subfield can be defined as follows:

Physician(s) – When more than one physician is defined in the Physician(s) subfield, the System displays a list of the defined physicians and prompts for one to be selected. Once a physician is selected, the System prompts for a patient to be identified. Only those patients assigned to the physician are available for selection on the All Patient Alpha Screen. When the Physician(s) subfield of this lookup type is not defined, the System prompts for a physician to be identified.

(C) Current User – Displays the All Patient Alpha Screen for the physician currently signed on to the System.

(T) Terminal Default – Displays the All Patient Alpha Screen listing the patients assigned to the physician in the location of the terminal being used.

(U) User Asked – Prompts for a physician to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the physician using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the All Patient Alpha Screen for that physician.

When the Data field, Check Assignment? subfield is defined as yes, the System performs an assignment check to ensure the user had a previous assignment with the patient within the last year. This check is performed only when a patient identification method, other than a partial name, is used, such as visit number, social security number, and so on. When the check fails, that is, the user is/has not been assigned to the patient, the System displays an error message and only those patients who are currently assigned to the user can be selected. All other patients who match the partial name are unavailable for selection.

The System includes deceased patients on the list of identified patients during a patient search, based on the definition of the Data field, Suppress Deceased? subfield.

Patient Identification MethodsA patient can be identified using the following methods:

Name match – Allows a patient to be identified by an exact or partial name match. For example, when the name Smith is entered, the System searches for all patients whose last name exactly matches Smith. Patients named Smithe or Smyth do not display, since the search is limited to an exact match. A dash ( - ) can be used to replace the unspecified portion(s) of the last name, for example, S- or Sta-. The System displays all patients whose last name begins with those letters. An asterisk (*) can replace a single character in the name, for example, Sm*th.

In addition, searching on multiple names does not have any negative affect on the search. For example, a search for Dillon Edwards Frank, Albert Barry Charles using -di-ed- narrows the search for all patients with multiple-spaced first or last name beginning with these letters.



Soundex – Allows a patient to be identified by entering a sound-alike name. This process is known as soundex. When using soundex, a complete sound-alike of the last name must be entered. The System does not search for soundex partial names.

To initiate a soundex name match, a tilde ( ~ ) must be entered in front of the patient's last name. Some or all of the first name can be specified; however, soundex matching is not performed on the first name.

The soundex feature is available only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Disable Soundex Processing? field is defined as no.

Sex/birthdate – Allows a patient to be identified by entering his/her full or partial last name, followed by a slash ( / ) and his/her sex (M, F, U), for example, Smith/F. The System displays a list of patients in the database who have the specified last name and gender.

The System always includes the unknown ( U ) sex in gender searches. For example, when a U is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria, regardless of gender. When M is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria and whose gender is male or unknown.

A patient can also be identified by entering his/her full or partial last name followed by a slash ( / ), gender (M, F, U), another slash ( / ), and his/her birthdate, for example, Smi-/F/1960. The System displays a list of patients who have the specified last name, gender, and birthdate. When a birthdate search is performed, such as, Smith//~1934, the System displays patients who have the specified last name whose birthdate falls within a plus or minus five-year-range, that is 1929-1939. The birthdate can be entered as a specific date or year. Approximate dates are allowed when prefixed by a tilde ( ~ ).

If the current year is used, for example, Smi-/04, the System does not use the year of the birthdate in determining which patients to display. The System displays all patients who match the specified last name and gender. However, if the birthdate search includes the month and/or day plus the current year, for example, Smi-//feb 25 2004, the System displays those patients who match the specified last name, gender, and birth month and/or day.

Number – Indicates a patient can be identified by manually entering an identification number or scanning a patient identification wristband. The following numbers can be used to identify a patient:

Visit Number – Visit numbering parameters are defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Visit Numbering Parameters Screen. The v character is reserved in the System as the prefix for the Visit Number when using a barcoder.

Secondary Number – Secondary numbers must be preceded by a unique identifier to distinguish it from the patient number or other secondary numbers, for example, X473936. Secondary numbers and unique identifiers are defined in the Secondary Number Table, ^rt("sn"), and Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn"), for registration and visit secondary numbers, respectively.



Social Security Numbers – Social Security numbers are defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Social Security # data element, and must be preceded by ss.

Prescription Numbers – Prescription numbers must be preceded by the prefix defined for the prescription pool in the Prescription Pool Table, ^pt("rxp"). Prescription number pools are linked to the Patient Identification menu function, Prescription Number Pool push parameter.

NHS Number – When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Visit History Definition field, Visit History Number Display subfield is defined as NHS Number, the visit history header displays the patient's NHS Number. NHS numbers are defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient NHS Number data element. The NHS Number displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters Level, System Language field is defined as UK English.

When a patient number is entered, the System checks to make sure the correct number of digits have been entered. The System does not recognize partial patient numbers.

When an identification number is entered that does not match any patient numbers, the System displays an error message indicating that the number does not exist.

Adaptation for Bar Code UseThe scanning of patient ID bracelets coded with a specific number is becoming increasingly commonplace as a way to ensure positive patient identification. The identification of a patient can occur in a number of different workflow environments in the typical acute care setting. Examples include during medication administration, specimen collection, patient transfer, and so on. A number of these workflow examples include portable workstations, which do not always have easy keyboard access. The Data field, Default Barcode Input Type subfield of this lookup type provides the ability to scan the barcode on a patient ID bracelet without requiring keyboard input.

The Data field, Default Barcode Input Type subfield determines how the System interprets a number entered by a barcode scanner when there is no letter prefix. The default barcode input type can be defined as visit number, patient number, visit secondary number, patient secondary number, or NHS Number. The default is patient number.

The barcode reader automatically inserts the appropriate prefix to identify the default number. For example, when the visit number is defined as the default number, the System automatically includes the prefix v to identify the number when scanned.

Access to confidential visits must be defined in the associated Patient Identification menu function, Confidential Processing push parameter. In order for authorized users to access a confidential patient name, an alpha/numeric secondary number, instead of the patient name, must be entered when identifying the patient. The user must enter the correct prefix as defined in the Secondary Number Table, ^rt("sn"), Prefix field, along with the secondary number, to get an exact match.



Non-matching Number TypesThe following information applies when the user scans a bar code pre-printed with a number differing from the configured default:

Non-matching Patient Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a patient number which differs from the configured default, the same matching character selected from the System Parameter Table ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field needs to be entered manually. This allows the System to recognize the number as a patient number.

Non-matching Visit Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a visit number which differs from the configured default, a v character must be entered manually for the System to recognize the number as a visit number.

Non-matching Visit Secondary Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a visit secondary number which differs from the configured default, he/she will need to manually enter the character selected from the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“vsn”), for the System to recognize the number as a visit secondary number.

Non-matching Patient Secondary Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a patient secondary number which differs from the configured default, he/she will need to manually enter the character selected from the Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), for the System to recognize the number as a patient secondary number.

Non-matching NHS number – When the user scans an NHS number bar code wrist band, he/she will need to manually enter the NHS number prefix characters (either lower case or upper case NHS) for the System to recognize the number as an NHS number.

The ability to scan the barcode on a patient ID without requiring keyboard entry is available in the Patient Identification menu function and the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application when the all patient alpha and visit alpha lookup types are used. In addition, the following CPR menu functions that contain embedded patient identification are affected:

Film/Chart Batch Request/Checkout

Film/Chart Interim Location

Result Entry (Multiple Events)

If any prefix is present, either user entered or pre-printed in the barcode, the System overrides the definition of the Default Barcode Input Type subfield and looks to the appropriate number type based on the defined prefix.

The barcode scanner must be configured to append a + character to the front of the number. This allows the System to identify the entry as a barcode entry. In addition, when the user keys in a+ followed by a number, the System identifies the entry as a barcode entry.



Column Header DisplayColumn header information, as described below, defined in the Data field, Primary Lookup Type subfield, Display Modifier sub-subfield of this lookup type, can display on the All Patient Alpha Screen within Ulticare and Javaview desktops. In addition, when the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id"), is linked to the Desktop Application Table, ^at("dta"), Desktop Application Class: Patient List, the same column header information can also display in the QuadraMed CPR Clinical Desktop Patient List application:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated when necessary.

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Name Format field is defined as multi-space delimited, the Last/First Name Delimiter field must be defined with the comma delimiter, to support the use of multiple names. For example, Dillon, Edward Frank Albert.

Since the delimiter is stored as part of the name throughout the System, changing the delimiter after names have been entered causes those names to not be easily identified using a partial name lookup that includes the delimiter. Patient headers, patient lists, work queues, patient displays, and employee type lists display the delimiter that was active at the time the name was entered.

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Primary Name With Alias? field is defined as yes, the patient's primary name displays in parentheses following the alias name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen.

When the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as dual line full address, the System displays the default information of the patient’s name, number, secondary number (if defined; the secondary number can be defined as a patient secondary number, NHS number or Social Security number), visit cnt, sex, birthdate, age and status on the top line, and then displays the patient’s full address in dim text on the second line. The address display follows the format as defined in the System Parameter Table, %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Single Line Addr Display Format field. The address displays in dim text. If the full address does not have room to display, the full address displays utilizing the hover. The Dual Line Address Display is shown below.



Sex or Gender – Displays the gender of the patient, that is, M for Male, F for Female, U for Unknown. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier, primary care provider, dual line full address or none. This column displays as gender within the Patient List application.

Birthdate – Displays the patient's date of birth.

Age – Displays the age of the patient based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^ %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Age in Day(s) Until and Display Age In Month(s) Until fields.Displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier, primary care provider, dual line full address, or none.

City/State – Displays the patient's home city and state. Displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as city/state/NOK.

NOK Name – Displays the patient's next of kin. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as city/state/NOK. The next of kin name is defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Next of Kin Name data element.

NOK Rel – Displays the relationship of the next of kin to the patient. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as city/state/NOK.The next of kin relationship is defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Next of Kin Relationship data element.

Number – Displays the patient's medical record number. The number format is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider, dual line full address or none.

PCP (Primary Care Provider) – Displays the patient's primary care provider (PCP), as specified in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Care Providers data element. The System displays the short name of the patient's primary care provider as defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field. Displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider.

Plan – Displays the insurance plan defined for the patient, as specified in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Insurance/Payor data element or the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Insurance/Payor data element. Displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider.

The Dual Line Full Address functionality displays only in the Patient Identification menu function (Ultiview and Javaview graphical user interface formats). It is not available in the Clinical Desktop Application, Patient List.



Visit Cnt – Displays the number of visits that have been made for the patient. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as dual line full address or none. A summary of the patient's visits can be accessed from the Visit History Information Screen.

Stat – Displays the visit status of the patient. When the patient has an active visit, the two-letter visit type displays, for example, IP, OP, CP and others. When the patient is deceased, EXP displays. This information displays only when the Data field, Display Modifier subfield is defined as dual line full address or none.

Secondary Identifier Information – Displays the patient's secondary identifier with the patient's name. For example, the mother's maiden name could be used to correctly identify a pediatric patient. The System displays the heading defined in the System Parameter Table, ̂ %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Header field. The information that displays under this heading is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Link field. The Secondary Identifier Link field collects the Generic Registration Data Element Table, ^rt("gr"), option that determines the data to display. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier.

In order for secondary identifier information to display for a patient, the following must be defined:

The field created from the specified Registration Screen Sequence Table, ̂ rt("rs"), generic data element must be defined during registration processing.

The generic registration data element defined during patient registration must be linked to a Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), generic data element, Storage Reference Constants field, and that storage option, that is a Generic Registration Data Element Table, ^rt("gr") data element, must be linked to the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Link field.

Secondary Number (Dual Line Address) – Displays the secondary number (that is, a patient secondary number, NHS, or Social Security number) as a column header according to the definition of the Data field, Display Modifier subfield, (F) Dual Line Full Address option of this lookup type which is shown in the figure above. Secondary numbers are defined in the Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), and are defined for a patient in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Secondary Numbers data element. NHS numbers are defined for a patient in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient NHS Number data element. Social Security numbers are defined for a patient in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Social Security # data element.

Any Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), generic data element can be used; however, the System does not format any information entered into the field created from the generic data element.



Processing Multiple PatientsThe all patient alpha lookup type facilitates processing multiple patients in the Event Checkin menu function. The user can return to the current patient's visit summary screen when using the Event Checkin menu function, by clicking (A) Accept Checkin.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected.



Input Define this subfield as all patient alpha.

Required

System Use Displays patients in alphabetical order.

Defining this subfield as all patient alpha causes the following subfields to display for definition:

Suppress Deceased?Check Assignment?Display ModifierInter-Fac Visit Processing?Default Barcode Input Type

Impact of Change


Suppress Deceased?

Purpose Defines whether deceased patients display for selection during a patient search using this lookup type.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Does not display deceased patients on the list during a patient search.

No – Includes deceased patients on the list of identified patients during a patient search.

Impact ofChange


Check Assignment?

Purpose Defines whether the System verifies if the user signed on was previously assigned to the identified patient.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System performs an assignment check to ensure the user had a previous assignment with the patient within the last year. Defining this subfield as yes causes the Physician(s) subfield to display for definition.

No – Indicates the System allows access to all patients.

Impact ofChange


Physician(s)

Purpose Defines the physician(s) for whom patients display when this lookup type is accessed. This subfield displays only when the Check Assignment? subfield is defined as yes.

Primary Lookup Type



Input (A) AddPartial name match

Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âeNOTE: Only those employees who have the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field defined as yes display for selection.

(C) Current User

(T) Terminal Default

(U) User Asked

Expand

(D) Delete

(C) Current User


(U) User Asked

Defaults to user asked

System Use Displays patients for the physician(s) defined in this subfield when this lookup type is accessed. When more than one physician is defined in this subfield, the System prompts the user to select a physician when this lookup type is accessed.

(A) Add – Allows a physician to added to the list of physician(s) for whom patients display when this lookup type is accessed.

(D) Delete – Removes a physician from the list of physician(s) for whom patients display when this lookup type is accessed.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. An employee is considered a physician when the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field is defined as yes.

(T) Terminal Default – Displays the patients assigned to the physician in the location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts for a physician to be identified when this lookup type option is accessed. Only those employees who have the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field defined as yes can be identified.

Expand – Allows a physician(s) to be added to the list of physician(s) for whom patients display when this lookup type is accessed, using standard employee/provider identification methods. Displays patients for that physician when this lookup type is accessed.

Impact ofChange


Physician(s)



Display Modifier

Purpose Defines the information that displays along with the patient's name when a patient is identified using this lookup type.

Input (I) Secondary Identifier

(A) City/State/NOK

(P) Primary Care Provider

(F) Dual Line Full AddressSingle selection

Links from the Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”)(S) Social Security Number(N) NHS Number (UK customers must define this option for appropriate processing)

(O) None

(N) None

Defaults to none

System Use (I) Secondary Identifier – Displays the patient's secondary identifier with the patient's name.

(A) City/State/NOK – Displays the patient's name, city and state, next of kin name, and the next of kin relationship to the patient.

(P) Primary Care Provider – Displays the provider and insurance plan with the patient name.

NOTE: The Dual Line Full Address functionality displays only in the Patient Identification menu function (Ultiview and Javaview graphical user interface formats). It is not available in the Clinical Desktop Application, Patient List.

(F) Dual Line Full Address – Displays the default information of the patient’s name, number, secondary number (if defined; the secondary number can be defined as a patient secondary number, NHS number or Social Security number), visit cnt, sex, birthdate, age and status on the top line, and then displays the patient’s full address on the second line.

The address display follows the format as defined in the System Parameter Table,%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Single Line Addr Display Format field. The address displays in dim text. If the full address does not have room to display, the full address displays utilizing the hover.

This option can be defined as follows:

Patient Secondary Number – Displays the title of the secondary number as a column header. Displays the patient secondary number option defined in this subfield in the column. A secondary number can be used as the primary patient number or as another identification number.

(S) Social Security Number – Displays SS# as a column header. Displays the patient Social Security Number, if defined, in the column.

(N) NHS Number – Displays NHS# as a column header. Displays the patient’s NHS number, if defined, in the column.

(O) None – Indicates no additional column header displays (that is, patient secondary number, social security number, or NHS number). The full patient’s address still displays on the second line.



(N) None – Displays standard visit and demographic information with the patient's name, sex, age, and so on. The word Gender displays on the Clinical Desktop Patient List application and Sex in the Patient Identification menu function in Ultiview/Javaview.

Impact ofChange


Inter-Fac Visit Processing?

Purpose Defines whether a pending visit can be created at one facility for potential activation at another facility.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to No

System Use Yes – Allows a pending visit to be created at one facility for potential activation at another facility. Pending visits at the first facility can be selected from the Visit History Screen during visit processing at a different facility, when a patient is identified using this lookup type.

No – Does not allow a pending visit to be created at one facility for potential activation at another facility

Impact ofChange


Default Barcode Input Type

Purpose Defines the default input type recognized by the System as the number input during the barcode scan.

Input (V) Visit Number

(P) Patient Number

Defaults to patient number

System Use (S) Visit Secondary Number – This option displays only if the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters Subfile, Facility specific-level, Secondary Number Processing Parameters Screen, Secondary Number Used As Visit Number field is defined with a visit secondary number.

(T) Patient Secondary Number – This option displays only if the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters Subfile, Facility specific-level, Secondary Number Processing Parameters Screen, Secondary Number Used As Patient Number field is defined with a patient secondary number.

(N) NHS Number – This option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters Level, System Language field is defined as UK English.

(V) Visit Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the visit number during the barcode scan and inserts the v prefix.

(P) Patient Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the patient number during the barcode scan. The patient number prefix is determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field.

Display Modifier (Continued)



(S) Visit Secondary Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as a visit secondary number during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

(T) Patient Secondary Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

Definition of Prefix

For customer sites using this enhancement, the following database configuration is recommended:

The System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field must be defined

The Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“vsn”), visit secondary number option must have a prefix defined when the following occurs:

When the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Default Barcode Number Type subfield is defined with the visit secondary number option

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Secondary Number Processing Screen, Secondary Number Used As Visit Number field is defined with a visit secondary number

The Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), secondary number option must have a prefix defined when the following occurs:

When the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Default Barcode Number Type subfield is defined with the patient secondary number option

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Secondary Number Processing Screen, Secondary Number Used As Patient Number field is defined with a patient secondary number

(N) NHS Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the NHS number during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

NOTE: If any prefix is present, either user entered or pre-printed in the barcode, the System overrides the definition of this subfield and looks to the appropriate number type based on the defined prefix.

Impact ofChange


Default Barcode Input Type (Continued)

The bar code scanner must be configured to append a + character to the front of the number. This allows the System to identify this as a bar code entry. Also, if the user keys in a + followed by a number, the System identifies the entry as a bar code entry.


Chapter 5

Visit Alpha Lookup Type

OverviewThe visit alpha lookup type is used to display patients who have a specified visit type(s) and status(s). This lookup type allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as active inpatients.

Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen this option is selected, the System prompts for a patient to be identified. The patient population that can be accessed depends on how the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield is defined. Defining the visit type(s) and allowable status(es) determines the patients who can display on the Visit Alpha Screen. This subfield can be defined to allow a certain subset of

Table Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit Alpha Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit Alpha Lookup Type:


Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments use this table to access a specific visit type(s)/status, such as active inpatients. These lists can be divided alphabetically by first letter of patient last name, or by partial name search.

PhysiciansPhysicians use this lookup type to access a specific visit type(s)/status, such as active inpatients.



patients to be accessed (that is, active inpatients). The System displays only those patients with a visit type and status defined in this subfield. Multiple visit types and statuses can be defined. The System defaults to all visit types/statuses. A dash ( – ) can be used to identify all patients for the specified visit type(s)/status(es) or the following methods can be used to identify a patient:

Name match – Allows a patient to be identified by an exact or partial name match. For example, when the name Smith is entered, the System searches for all patients whose last name exactly matches Smith. Patients named Smithe or Smyth do not display, since the search is limited to an exact match. A dash ( – ) can be used to replace the unspecified portion(s) of the last name (for example, S-, or Smi-). The System displays all patients whose last name begins with those letters. An asterisk ( * ) can replace a single character in the name (for example, Sm*th).

Soundex – Allows a patient to be identified by entering a sound-alike name. This process is known as soundex. When using soundex, a complete sound-alike of the last name must be entered. The System does not search for soundex partial names.To initiate a soundex name match, a tilde ( ~ ) must be entered in front of the patient’s last name. Some or all of the first name can be specified; however, soundex matching is not performed on the first name.The soundex feature is available only when the System Parameter Table, ^ %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Disable Soundex Processing? field is defined as no.

Gender/birthdate – Allows a patient to be identified by entering his/her full or partial last name, followed by a slash ( / ) and his/her gender (M, F, U). The System displays a list of patients in the database who have the specified last name and gender.

A patient can also be identified by entering his/her full last name followed by a slash (/), gender (M, F, U), another slash ( / ), and his/her birthdate. The System displays a list of patients who have the specified last name, gender, and birthdate. A birthdate search can be performed without a gender search by entering a U (unknown) or nothing between the two slashes. (for example, Smith// ~ 1934). The birthdate can be entered as a specific date or year. Approximate dates are allowed when prefixed by a tilde (~).

Number – Indicates a patient can be identified by manually entering an identification number or scanning a patient identification wristband. The following numbers can be used to identify a patient:

Visit Number – Visit numbering parameters are defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Visit Numbering Parameters Screen. The v character is reserved in the System as the prefix for the visit number when using a barcoder.

The System always includes the unknown ( U ) sex in gender searches. For example, when a U is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria, regardless of gender. When M is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria and whose gender is male or unknown.



Secondary Number – Secondary numbers must be preceded by a unique identifier to distinguish it from the patient number or other secondary numbers, for example, X473936. Secondary numbers and unique identifiers are defined in the Secondary Number Table, ^rt("sn"), and Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn"), for registration and visit secondary numbers, respectively.

Social Security Numbers – Social Security numbers are defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Social Security # data element, and must be preceded by ss.

Prescription Numbers – Prescription numbers must be preceded by the prefix defined for the prescription pool in the Prescription Pool Table, ^pt("rxp"). Prescription number pools are linked to the Patient Identification menu function, Prescription Number Pool push parameter.

NHS Number – When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Visit History Definition field, Visit History Number Display subfield is defined as NHS Number, the visit history header displays the patient's NHS Number. NHS numbers are defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient NHS Number data element. The NHS Number displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters Level, System Language field is defined as UK English.

When a patient number is entered, the System checks to make sure the correct number of digits have been entered. The System does not recognize partial patient numbers.

When an identification number is entered that does not match any patient numbers, the System displays an error message indicating that number does not exist.

Bed lookup name – Allows a patient to be identified using a bed lookup name. Bed lookup names are defined in the Area Table, ^ afa, Sub-area or Sub-sub-area level, Look-up Name(s) field. When the lookup name is valid, and a patient is currently checked into the bed, the System accesses the visit for that patient. When the bed lookup name is not valid, an error message displays.

The following information displays on the Visit Alpha Screen:


When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Primary Name With Alias? field is defined as yes, the patient’s primary name displays in parentheses following the alias name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen.

Location – Displays the patient's home location or visit type and status.

Access to confidential visits must be defined in the associated Patient Identification menu function, Confidential Processing push parameter. In order for authorized users to access a confidential patient name, an alpha/numeric secondary number, instead of the patient name, must be entered when identifying the patient. The user must enter the correct prefix as defined in the Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), Prefix field, along with the secondary number, to get an exact match.



Number – Displays the patient's medical record number.

Visit Number – Displays the number that identifies the patient's visit.


Age – Displays the age of the patient based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Age in Day(s) Until and Display Age In Month(s) Until fields.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's responsible physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/ Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Adaptation for Bar Code Use – The scanning of patient ID bracelets coded with a specific number is becoming increasingly commonplace as a way to ensure positive patient identification. The identification of a patient can occur in a number of different workflow environments in the typical acute care setting. Examples include during medication administration, specimen collection, patient transfer, and so on. A number of these workflow examples include portable workstations, which do not always have easy keyboard access. The Data field, Default Barcode Input Type subfield of this lookup type provides the ability to scan the barcode on a patient ID bracelet without requiring keyboard input.

The Data field, Default Barcode Input Type subfield determines how the System interprets a number entered by a barcode scanner when there is no letter prefix. The default barcode input type can be defined as visit number, patient number, visit secondary number, patient secondary number, or NHS number. The default is patient number.

The barcode reader automatically inserts the appropriate prefix to identify the default number. For example, when the visit number is defined as the default number, the System automatically includes the prefix v to identify the number when scanned.

Non-matching Number TypesThe following information applies when the user scans a bar code pre-printed with a number differing from the configured default:

If any prefix is present, either user entered or pre-printed in the barcode, the System overrides the definition of the Default Barcode Input Type subfield and looks to the appropriate number type based on the defined prefix.

The barcode scanner must be configured to append a + character to the front of the number. This allows the System to identify the entry as a barcode entry. In addition, when the user keys in a + followed by a number, the System identifies the entry as a barcode entry.



Non-matching Patient Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a patient number which differs from the configured default, the same matching character selected from the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field needs to be entered manually. This allows the System to recognize the number as a patient number.

Non-matching Visit Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a visit number which differs from the configured default, a v character must be entered manually for the System to recognize the number as a visit number.

Non-matching Visit Secondary Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a visit secondary number which differs from the configured default, he/she will need to manually enter the character selected from the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“vsn”), for the System to recognize the number as a visit secondary number.

Non-matching Patient Secondary Number Barcode – When the user scans a barcode pre-printed with a patient secondary number which differs from the configured default, he/she will need to manually enter the character selected from the Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), for the System to recognize the number as a patient secondary number.

Non-matching NHS number – When the user scans an NHS number bar code wrist band, he/she will need to manually enter the NHS number prefix characters (either lower case or upper case NHS) for the System to recognize the number as an NHS number.

Availability of BarcodingThe ability to scan the barcode on a patient ID without requiring keyboard entry is available in the Patient Identification menu function and the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application when the all patient alpha and visit alpha lookup types are utilized. In addition, the following CPR menu functions that contain embedded patient identification are affected:

Film/Chart Batch Request/CheckoutFilm/Chart Interim LocationResult Entry (Multiple Events)

Processing Multiple PatientsThe Visit Alpha lookup type facilitates processing multiple patients in the Event Checkin menu function. The user can return to the current patient's visit summary screen when using the Event Checkin menu function, by clicking (A) Accept Checkin.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required



(O) Option – Allows an option to display on the selection screen. Options provide a way of looking up patients through various categories. Causes the Data field to display for definition. Options are selectable on the user side. They display in bright text in this table and on the user side.

Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected.

Input Define this subfield as visit alpha

Required

System Use Displays only patients with visit type(s)/status(es) defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield

Displays patients in alphabetical order according to the definition of the Visit Type/Status List subfield. For example, when the Visit Type/Status List subfield is defined with a specific visit type/status, the System displays only those patients in alphabetical order when a dash ( – ) is entered at the transaction text box or the Patient ID text box.

Defining this subfield as visit alpha causes the following subfields to display for definition:

Visit Type/Status ListDefault Barcode Input Type

Impact ofChange




Visit Type/Status List

Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, for example, active inpatients, active emergency, and others.

Input Multiple selection from the following hard-coded Visit Type/Status options:

Statuses display for selection under Visit Type headers.

Inpatient Visit Type

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency Visit Type

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient Visit Type

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic Visit Type

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral Visit Type

Discharge



Short Stay Visit Type

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health Visit Type

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required

System Use Allows only the patients who have the specified visit type and status to be accessed when a patient is identified using this lookup type.

(C) Clear – Clears all previous visit types and statuses from this subfield.

Impact ofChange


Default Barcode Input Type

Purpose Defines the default input type recognized by the System as the number input during the barcode scan.

Input (V) Visit Number

(P) Patient Number

Defaults to patient number

System Use (S) Visit Secondary Number – Displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters Subfile, Facility specific-level, Secondary Number Processing Parameters Screen, Secondary Number Used As Visit Number field is defined with a visit secondary number.

(T) Patient Secondary Number – Displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters Subfile, Facility specific-level, Secondary Number Processing Parameters Screen, Secondary Number Used As Patient Number field is defined with a patient secondary number.

(N) NHS Number – Displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters Level, System Language field is defined as UK English.

Visit Type/Status List (Continued)



(V) Visit Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the visit number during the barcode scan and inserts the v prefix.

(P) Patient Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the patient number during the barcode scan. The patient number prefix is determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field.

(S) Visit Secondary Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as a visit secondary number during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

(T) Patient Secondary Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

Definition of Prefix

For customer sites using this enhancement, the following database configuration is recommended:

The System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Patient Numbering Parameters Screen, Prefix field must be defined

The Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“vsn”), visit secondary number option must have a prefix defined when the following occurs:

When the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Default Barcode Number Type subfield is defined with the visit secondary number option.

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Secondary Number Processing Screen, Secondary Number Used As Visit Number field is defined with a visit secondary number.

The Secondary Number Table, ^rt(“sn”), secondary number option must have a prefix defined when the following occurs:

When the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Default Barcode Number Type subfield is defined with the patient secondary number option.

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Secondary Number Processing Screen, Secondary Number Used As Patient Number field is defined with a patient secondary number.

(N) NHS Number – Indicates the System recognizes the number input as the NHS number during the barcode scan and inserts the appropriate prefix.

NOTE: When the user enters a prefix prior to scanning the barcode, the entered prefix overrides the prefix defined in this subfield.

Impact ofChange


Default Barcode Input Type (Continued)

The bar code scanner must be configured to append a + character to the front of the number. This allows the System to identify this as a bar code entry. Also, if the user keys in a + followed by a number, the System identifies the entry as a bar code entry.


Chapter 6

Physician Alpha Lookup Type

OverviewThe physician alpha lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a responsible physician. This lookup type is similar to the physician location lookup type, except the System displays the patients in alphabetical order. This lookup type also allows the physician to access other patient groups, such as other visit type(s) or status(es).

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afaEmployee/Provider Table, ^aeVisit type Table, ^rt(“vt”)

Department Usage Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to display patients they are responsible for in alphabetical order. In addition, it provides the means to access other patient identification groups, such as visit type(s)/status(es), without going to another menu point.



Lookup TypesLookup types defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), can be customized for display in the Patient Identification menu function and the Clinical Desktop Patient List application. The following description describes only a portion of these functions.

Patient Identification (Javaview)When this option is selected to identify a patient from the Patient Identification menu function (Javaview), the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Physician subfield defines the physician for whom the patients display. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the Physician Alpha Screen for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the Physician Alpha Screen as shown below for the physician currently signed on to the System as shown in the figure below. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Terminal Default – Displays the Physician Alpha Screen for the identified physician selected based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Ask User – Prompts for a physician to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the physician using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the Physician Alpha Screen for that physician.

For a complete description of the Patient List application, refer to Chapter 14, Patient List in the Clinical Desktop Applications Reference.

When the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as ask user or a specific physician, the System displays different headings and processing options on the Physician Alpha Screen than the headings displayed for current user. See the figures below.



When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified after a physician has been identified. The patients who display are limited to the patients being seen by the physician. Patient alias names do not display on the physician patient list.

Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Alpha Screen according to the following criteria:

Only patients in beds – The System displays only patients who are checked into beds when the Data field, Only Patients in Beds? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Visit Location – The System displays patients for the defined physician who are assigned to the location defined in the Data field, Location subfield of this lookup type. The System displays only those patients who have the selected visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

Specified visit type/status – The System displays patients for the specified physician according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type.



The Physician Alpha Screen can display the following information:

Name/Patient Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated and display with ellipsis when necessary.



Location – Displays the patient’s home location or visit type and status (Example: 5903-A, Active EP). Discharged patients display when the Data field, Discharge Display subfield of this lookup type is defined as all discharged visits or display discharged visits with queue entries only. Patients with lifecare visits and queue entries for the specified provider display when the Data field, Display Lifecare Patients? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient’s responsible physician. The provider’s short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Capacity – Displays the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). This column displays when the (R) Reassign option is selected. The Capacity column replaces the Physician column on the Physician Alpha Screen.

Action – Displays the number of action items in the review queue for the patient. Action items are orders that require renewal or signature, attestation deficiencies, results to be completed by the physician, or result verification items.

This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as no and the Physician subfield is defined as current user or a specific physician, replacing the Sign/Oth column.

Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, replacing the Action column. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column

Order to Sign – ActiveOrder to Sign – InactiveResult Verification

ASO/RenewResults to be completedReview/Hold



Review – Displays the number of review items in the review queue for the patient. Review items are results that need to be reviewed by the physician.

Def/Del – Displays the number of deficiencies and delinquencies for the patient. When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definitions Screen, Deficiency Tracking Definition field is defined as yes for any visit type, the System replaces the Physician Alpha Screen, STAT/ASAP (orders or results that require immediate attention) column with this column.

STAT/ASAP – Displays the number of STAT/ASAP items for the patient. STAT/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention.

The following processing options can display on the Physician Alpha Screen:

Select patient – Allows a menu function or desktop for the patient to be accessed.

(G) Group – Displays the Patient List Screen for all the patients being seen by any member of the physician’s group, either on an attending or consulting basis. This processing option displays when a group is defined for the physician and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. Physician groups are defined in the Physician Group Table, ^aet(“pg”), and linked to a physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Provider Group field.

(C) Coverage – Displays the patients assigned to the physician, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician. This option displays only when the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. Clicking this option displays the (E) Edit Coverage List option that allows a physician to make changes to his/her coverage list while viewing the Patient Identification Screen. This option displays only when the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield is defined as no.

(L) Personal List – Displays the patients on the physician’s personal list (that is, a group of patients to whom the physician is not assigned but would like to track). This processing option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Data Screen, Allow Phys. Personal List Processing? field is defined as yes, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician.

For complete information regarding this processing option, refer to Chapter 15, Physician Processor for Visit in the Patient Data Review Function Reference.

Defining the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield of this lookup type as yes causes the System to disable the ability to edit the coverage list for the physician, however, the user can click the (C) Coverage button to view the list.

For complete information regarding this processing option, refer to Chapter 14, Patient List in the Clinical Desktop Applications Reference.



(S) Sign Out – Allows a physician to sign out a patient(s). Displays only those patients to whom the physician is assigned as an attending, consulting, resident, or additional responsible physician. Once the physician selects the patients to sign out, the System removes the patient’s name from the physician’s assignment list and removes the physician’s name from the Provider Assignment Editor menu function for the patient. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

(N) Reassign – Allows a physician to reassign a patient(s) to another physician. Displays a list of patients to whom the physician is assigned. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. The System prompts to select a patient to reassign or choose from the following capacity processing options:

(A) Attending – Reassigns all patients for whom the physician is the attending to a new attending physician. Displays a list of physicians including the physicians who are in the same group as the user, additional responsible physicians, consultants, and/or residents. The System prompts to enter the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are to be reassigned. The new physician can be identified using standard employee identification methods. The System changes the service (that is, the attending physician) for each patient to whom the original physician is assigned. The System processes the patients at the same time, stepping the user through the assignment list. Once a new physician is identified, the System replaces the current physician’s name with the new physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function.

(C) Consulting – Reassigns the patients to a new consulting physician.

(R) Resident – Reassigns the patients to a new resident.

(L) Additional Responsible – Reassigns the patients to a new additional responsible physician.

Enter patient ID – Allows the user to identify a patient and select a visit. The System can display one of the following patient populations when a patient identification is entered from the text-box prompt on the Physician Alpha Screen:

Specified visit type/status – The System displays patients according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type. For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.

Access by consulting or attending physician – The System can prompt for a patient to be identified according to how the Data field, Patient Access Type subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Patient Access Type subfield can be defined as follows:

The capacities (that is, attending, consulting, and so on) must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”). For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.



Allow all patient lookup – Allows all patients for whom the physician has been assigned as an attending or consulting physician to display when a patient identification is entered at the text-box prompt.

No patient lookup – Does not display the patient identification prompt on the Physician Alpha Screen.

Only previous assignments – Causes patients who have been previously assigned to the defined physician to display when a patient identification is entered at the text-box prompt.

Print – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha Screen.

The physician census report is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Reg/ADT Reports and Message Definitions Screen, Physician Census Report field. When a physician census report(s) is printed, it is routed to the print queue defined for the terminal being used. The default print queue for the terminal is linked to the printer group defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Printer Group field.

Patient List ApplicationWhen this lookup type is selected to identify a patient in the QuadraMed CPR Clinical Desktop, Patient List application, the screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined. The lookup type that initially displays is defined in the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), and linked to the Desktop Application Table, ^at(“dta”), Desktop application Class: Patient List, Facility Parameters field, Facility-specific level, Initial Patient Identification Option subfield.

The Patient List application utilizes the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), to display the Navigator Menu structure. This information can be changed by clicking the down arrow in the Navigator Header Bar as shown in the figure below. For example, in the figure below, the default lookup type is Current Physician Alpha. Clicking the arrow in the Navigator Header Bar causes the System to display a list of additional lookup type options (Example: Current Physician Location).




Once the Patient List application has been launched, the System displays the Patient List Physician Alpha Screen as shown in the figure below. The screen that displays, depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield is defined.

The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the patients for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, ^ap, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the patients for the physician currently signed on to the System. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, ^ap, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Users can also access a Javaview Patient Identification shortcut to perform an additional patient search during Patient List.



Terminal Default – Displays the patients for the identified physician based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

The location search box displays above the tabs on the right side of the Physician Alpha Screen. When the down-arrow within the Search button is clicked, the System displays a list of units and/or departments belonging to the physician group defined in the Area Table, âfa, Facility-specific level, Assoc. Phy(s) field for the location defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field of the current device. The user can enter a location partial name in the box and press Enter or click OK, or click the Search button to search for a specific location. See the figure below.

Ask User – Displays the patients for the physician identified by the user. The display of patients depends on the definition of the physician’s individual or group list defined in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field.

The physician search box displays above the tabs to the right of the Physician Alpha Screen as shown in the figure below. When the down-arrow within the Search button is clicked, the System displays a list of individual physicians and physicians belonging to the physician group defined in the Area Table, âfa, Facility-specific level, Assoc. Phy(s) field, for the location defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field of the current device. The user can enter a physician ID/partial name in the box and press Enter or click OK, or click the Search button to search for an individual physician.



Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Alpha Screen according to the following criteria:



When the Location subfield is defined as ask user, a search box displays within the Patient List application. The user can enter a location partial name in the box and press ENTER or click OK, or click the Search button to search for a specific location.


The Physician Alpha Screen can display the following information:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated and display with ellipsis when necessary.




Physician – Displays the short name of the patient’s responsible physician. The provider’s short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Capacity – Displays the capacity identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). The information is sorted by a capacity header bar that also displays within the Capacity column as shown in the figure below. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected. Replaces the Physician column on the Physician Location Screen.





Def/Del – Displays the number of deficiencies and delinquencies for the patient.

Stat/ASAP – Displays the number of Stat/ASAP items for the patient. Stat/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected. (Replaces the Review column on the Physician Location Screen.)

Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. This column replaces the Action column when defined as yes. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column

When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definitions Screen, Deficiency Tracking Definition field is defined as yes, the System replaces the STAT/ASAP column with the Def/Del column.





When this lookup type is defined, the default lists of patients display on separate tabs. The user can choose another lookup type from the drop down box located above the first tab, with the group, coverage and resident service patient lists displaying on separate tabs. The following tabs and buttons can display on the Physician Alpha Screen:

Initial Tab – Displays the list of patients defined for the physician preferences in the Data field, Physician subfield of this table. This tab reflects the name of the lookup type defined in this table (Example: Physician Alpha). The following buttons can display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated when clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha Screen.


When multiple reports are defined, the Physician Census Report button displays a drop-down list of options. When the user clicks the drop-down arrow, the reports display for selection. Refer to the figure below.

Sign Out… – Displays a list of patients for whom the physician can sign out. Only those patients to whom the physician is assigned as an attending, consulting, resident, or additional responsible physician display.

Once the physician selects the patient(s) to sign out, the System removes the patient’s name from the physician’s assignment list and removes the physician’s name from the Provider Assignment Editor menu function for the patient. This button displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Reassign… – Allows a physician to reassign a patient(s) to another physician. This button displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

The list of patients display in an initial grouping by the Capacity column. The capacity grouping is labeled as Attending, Consulting, Resident or Add’l Responsible, separated by a header bar. The header bar displays a Reassign All… button (see Capacity column on page 65). The physician can select a specific patient for reassignment or select the Reassign All… button based on the capacity. For example, to reassign all consulting patients, the user clicks the Reassign All… button on the Consulting group header.

Goto Patient(s) – Displays the Object/Patient desktop for the selected patient(s). This option remains dim (disabled) until a patient(s) is selected.



Coverage Tab – Displays the patients assigned to the providers for whom the physician is covering. This tab displays when the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. The following button displays on this screen:



When multiple reports are defined, the Physician Census Report button displays a drop-down list of options. When the user clicks the drop-down arrow, the reports display for selection.

Change Coverage List – Allows a physician to make changes to his/her coverage list. This button displays only on the Coverage tab when the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield is defined as no. Clicking this button displays a pop-up window that contains radio buttons and search options to make changes to the coverage list. See the figure below.


Group Tab – Displays the patients assigned to any member of the physician’s group, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician. This tab displays when a group is defined for the physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Provider Group field, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. The following buttons display on this screen:







Resident Service Tab – Displays the patients associated with a specific resident service. This tab displays when the lookup type is defined with Resident Service. As with the physician lookup types, the resident service lookup type can display patients in alpha, location, or alpha/location order. The following buttons and options display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha Screen.




Filter Options – Displays a drop-down box to select patients from a specific resident service. Resident Services are defined in the Resident Service menu function, Resident Service(s) push parameter as shown in the figure below. The System defaults to all assigned services.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the lookup type that determines the type of list that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as physician alpha, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a specific physician in alphabetical order.

Input Defining this subfield as physician alpha, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

PhysicianLocationOnly Patients In Beds?Display Lifecare Patients?Partial Name Search?Patient Access TypeVisit Type/Status List



PTID Visit Type/Status ListAllow Signout/Reassign?Disable Coverage Edits?Split Action Item Counts?

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified physician in alphabetical order.

Impact ofChange


Physician

Purpose Defines the physician for whom the patient list displays when this lookup type is used.

Input Provider ID

Full/partial name lookup

Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âe. Employees display for selection beneath employee type headers. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, âet(“et”), and linked to an employee in the Employee/ Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

In order for a physician to be selected, the following must occur:

The Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field for the specified physician must be defined as yes.

The physician must have an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option.

NOTE: When the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Admit Privileges Status field is defined as anything other than full access or limited, the corresponding selection number displays in dim text and is unavailable for selection.

(C) Current User


(U) User Asked

Expand


System Use Provider ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified provider when this lookup type option is accessed. The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. Causes the Discharge Display subfield to display when a discharge status is defined in the Visit Type/Status List field of this lookup type. The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Patients display on the user side when the current user meets the following criteria:




The physician has the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field defined as yes.

The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option.

(T) Terminal Default – Displays the patients for the selected physician based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The physician’s individual list or group list display depends on the definition of the physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field.

User Asked – Displays the patients for the physician defined by the user. The physician’s individual list or group list display depends on the definition of the physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Only those employees who meet the following criteria can be identified:

The employee has the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field defined as yes.

The employee has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option.

Expand – Allows the provider to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. For a complete description of these methods, refer to Chapter 1, Employee/Provider Identification in the Employee/Provider Function Reference.

Impact ofChange


Discharge Display

Purpose Defines whether the System displays all discharged patients or only those discharged patients who have remaining queue entries. This subfield displays only when the Physician subfield is defined as current user and a discharge visit status has been defined in the Visit Type(s)/Status List subfield.


All discharged visits

Display discharged visits with queue entries only

Defaults to all discharged visits

System Use All discharged visits – Displays all discharged visits for the assigned physician on the Physician Alpha Screen.

Display discharged visits with queue entries only – Displays only those patients on the Physician Alpha Screen with discharged visits assigned to the physician who have entries in the review queue.

Impact ofChange


Physician (Continued)



Location

Purpose Defines the visit location used to determine which patients display when this lookup type is accessed. Only those patients assigned to the specified visit location display.

Input Specific location name

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area or Sub-sub-area, Lookup Name(s) field.


(U) Ask User

ExpandSingle selection

Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.

(C) Currently Selected Location

System Use Displays the patients assigned to the physician and checked into the visit location defined in this subfield.

Displays only those patients who have the selected location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

Specific location name – Displays only those patients in the specific location defined for the assigned physician.

(T) Terminal Location – Displays only those patients in the location of the terminal being used for the assigned physician. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

User Asked – Displays only those patients for the location defined by the user for the assigned physician.

(C) Currently Selected Location – Allows the user to define this field using the location level initially entered, rather than selecting a lower level. For example, a user might initially enter the location 5 North causing the System to display the room numbers 5101 and 5102 for selection. Clicking (C) Currently Selected Location defines this field as 5 North.

Impact ofChange


Only Patients In Beds?

Purpose Defines whether the System displays only those patients who are checked into beds.

Input Yes/No

(V) Visit Type SpecificVisit Type

Single selection

Links from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”)



NOTE: The Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield, must be defined as active for the visit type(s) to display patients checked into beds.

Bed Only?

Yes – Indicates the System displays only those patients who are checked into beds for the specific visit type. The System defaults to yes.

No – Indicates all patients assigned to the physician display, regardless of whether they are checked into a bed.

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates only those patients who are checked into beds display for the assigned physician. The visit type definition defaults to active inpatients only.


(V) Visit Type Specific – Displays only patients in beds by visit type(s) for the assigned physician.

Impact ofChange


Display Lifecare Patients?

Purpose Defines whether lifecare visit patients with queue entries display when this lookup type is used.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Displays the patients with queue entries for items stored on the patient’s lifecare visit for the assigned physician (Example: A prescription order to sign). Lifecare visit patients display with a visit type of Active LV.

No – Indicates lifecare visit patients with queue entries for items stored on their visit do not display for the physician.

Impact ofChange


Partial Name Search?

Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient.

NOTE: This functionality is used only in the Patient Identification menu function (PTID) and does not affect the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application. The Patient List provides the ability to easily select patients in a drop-down list or access a Javaview PTID shortcut to perform an additional search.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows patients to be identified by a partial name search.

No – Indicates the System automatically displays the patients assigned to the physician.

Impact ofChange


Only Patients In Beds? (Continued)



Patient Access Type

Purpose Defines the types of patients the physician is allowed access through the partial name search.


Input (A) Allow All Patient Lookup

(N) No Patient Lookup

(P) Only Previous Assignments

Defaults to all patients

System Use (A) Allow All Patient Lookup – Indicates all patients for whom the physician has been assigned as an attending or consulting physician displays when a patient identification lookup is entered at the text-box prompt.

(N) No Patient Lookup – Indicates the patient identification prompt does not display.

(P) Only Previous Assignments – Indicates the System invokes a recent assignment check and when a partial name is entered, only those patients for whom the physician has been assigned as an attending or consulting physician within the past year (365 days), or those patients who are currently assigned to the physician can be selected. All other patients who match the partial name are unavailable for selection. When a patient identification method other than a partial name is used (Example: visit number, social security number, and so on), a check is invoked to ensure that the user had a previous assignment to the patient within the last year. When the check fails, an error message displays.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as all active inpatients.

Input Multiple selection from the following hard-coded Visit Type/Status Options:

Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt




Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange




PTID Visit Type/Status List

Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when the physician enters a patient identification through a partial name search. When a visit type(s) and status(s) is not defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield, this subfield allows the physician to select other visit type(s) and status(s) options.

NOTE: This functionality is used only in the Patient Identification menu function and does not affect the Clinical Desktop, Patient List application. The Patient List provides the ability to easily select patients in a drop-down list or access a Javaview PTID shortcut to perform an additional search.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge



Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No ShowHome Health

Pending

Active

DischargeCancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

System Use Displays a separate patient list for use when the user enters a patient identification at the transaction line on the Physician Alpha Screen. When this subfield is not defined, only those patients with a visit type(s) and status(s) that match the Visit Type/Status List subfield are available for selection.

For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt from the Physician Alpha Screen, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.


Impact ofChange


Allow Signout/Reassign?

Purpose Defines whether the System allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign patients’ during/at the end of a shift.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign his/her patients during/at the end of a shift. Causes the following buttons to display on the Physician Alpha Screen:

Sign Out – Allows only those patients to whom the physician is assigned as an attending, consulting, resident, or additional responsible physician to display.

Reassign – Reassigns the physician’s patients to another physician in one of the following capacities:

PTID Visit Type/Status List (Continued)



Attending

Consulting

Additional Responsible

Resident

NOTE: The capacities must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ̂ aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents subfile. For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.

No – The System does not display the sign out or reassign buttons.

Impact ofChange


Disable Coverage Edits?

Purpose Defines whether a physician can disable his/her coverage list on the Patient Identification Screen or Patient List Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the (E) Edit Coverage List or Change Coverage List option does not display while viewing the Patient Identification menu function or Patient List application using this lookup type; however, the coverage list is still available for viewing by clicking the (C) Coverage button or Coverage Tab.

No – Displays the (E) Edit Coverage List or Change Coverage List option, allowing a physician to make changes to his/her coverage list while viewing the Patient Identification Screen or Patient List application.

Impact ofChange


Split Action Item Counts?

Purpose Defines whether the action items for the physician are split into items to be signed and other items to be documented from the Patient Identification menu function or Patient List application.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the Sign/Oth column displays in the Patient Identification menu function and the Patient List application. This heading displays a split count of those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented (Example: 2/3). In addition, the Sign/Oth column replaces the Action column.

No – Indicates the Action Items column displays on the Patient Identification menu function or the Patient List application. Displays the Action column with the Sign and Other item counts together (Example: 5).

Impact ofChange


Allow Signout/Reassign? (Continued)


Chapter 7

Physician Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe physician location lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a responsible physician. This lookup type is similar to the physician alpha lookup type, except the System displays the patients in location order. This lookup type also allows the physician to access other patient groups, such as other visit type(s) or status(es).

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Location Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Physician Location Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afaEmployee/Provider Table, ^aeVisit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”)

Department Usage Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to display patients they are responsible for in location order. In addition, it provides the means to access other patient identification groups, such as visit type(s)/status(es), without going to another menu point.




Patient Identification (Javaview)When this option is selected to identify a patient from the Patient Identification menu function (Javaview), the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Physician subfield defines the physician for whom the patients display. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the Physician Location Screen for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the Physician Location Screen for the physician currently signed on to the System as shown in the figure below. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Terminal Default – Displays the Physician Location Screen for the identified physician selected based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Ask User – Prompts for a physician to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the physician using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the Physician Location Screen for that physician.



When the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as ask user or a specific physician, the System displays different headings and processing options on the Physician Location Screen as shown in the figure below than the headings displayed for current user.



Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Location Screen according to the following criteria:




The Physician Location Screen can display the following information:







The patients can display under one of the following headings based on the patient’s status:

Active in Beds – Displays the active patients who have been checked into a bed and are assigned to the specified physician.

Active – Displays the active patients who are assigned to the specified physician.

Administrative – Displays the non-active patients who are assigned to the specified physician.


Capacity – Displays the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). This column displays when the (S) Sign Out and (N) Reassign options are selected. In addition, the Capacity column replaces the Physician column on the Physician Location Screen.

Action – Displays the number of action items in the review queue for the patient. Action items are orders that require renewal or signature, attestation deficiencies, results to be completed by the physician, or result verification items. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as no and the Physician subfield is defined as current user or a specific physician, replacing the Sign/Oth column.

Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, replacing the Action column. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column





Review – Displays the number of review items in the review queue for the patient. Review items are results that need to be reviewed by the physician. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.

Def/Del – Displays the number of deficiencies and delinquencies for the patient. When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definitions Screen, Deficiency Tracking Definition field is defined as yes for any visit type, the System replaces the Physician Location Screen, STAT/ASAP (orders or results that require immediate attention) column with this column. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.

STAT/ASAP – Displays the number of STAT/ASAP items for the patient. STAT/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.

The following processing options can display on the Physician Location Screen:


(G) Group – Displays the Physician Location Screen for all the patients being seen by any member of the physician’s group, either on an attending or consulting basis. This processing option displays when a group is defined for the physician and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. Physician groups are defined in the Physician Group Table, ^aet(“pg”), and linked to a physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Provider Group field.


For complete information regarding this processing option, refer to Chapter 16, Physician Processor in the Patient Data Review Function Reference.


Defining the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield of the lookup type as yes causes the System to disable the ability to edit the coverage list for the physician, however, the user can click the (C) Coverage button to view the list.



(L) Personal List – Displays the patients on the physician’s personal list (that is, a group of patients to whom the physician is not assigned but would like to track). This processing option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Data Screen, Allow Phys. Personal List Processing? field is defined as yes, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician.


(N) Reassign – Allows a physician to reassign a patient(s) to another physician. Displays a list of patients to whom the physician is assigned. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. The System prompts to select a patient to reassign or choose from the following processing options:

(A) Attending – Reassigns all patients for whom the physician is the attending to a new attending physician. Displays a list of physicians including the physicians who are in the same group as the user, additional responsible physicians, consultants, and/or residents. The System prompts to enter the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are to be reassigned. The new physician can be identified using standard employee identification methods.

The System changes the service (that is, the attending physician) for each patient to whom the original physician is assigned. The System processes the patients at the same time, stepping the user through the assignment list. Once a new physician is identified, the System replaces the current physician’s name with the new physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function.








Enter patient ID – Allows the user to identify a patient and select a visit. The System can display one of the following patient populations when a patient identification is entered from the text-box prompt on the Physician Location Screen:




No patient lookup – Does not display the patient identification prompt on the Physician Location Screen.


Print – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Location Screen.






The Patient List application utilizes the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), to display the Navigator Menu structure. This information can be changed by clicking the down arrow in the Navigator Header Bar as shown in the figure below. For example, in the figure below, the default lookup type is Physician Location. Clicking the arrow in the Navigator Header Bar causes the System to display a list of additional lookup type options (Example: Current Physician Location).

Once the Patient List application has been launched, the System displays the Patient List Physician Location Screen as shown below.


Navigator Header Bar

Physician Location Tabs



The screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield is defined. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the patients for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the patients for the physician currently signed on to the System. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

Terminal Default – Displays the patients for the identified physician based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

The search box displays above the tabs on the right side of the Physician Location Screen. When the down arrow is clicked on the drop-down box, the System displays a list of units and/or departments belonging to the physician or physician group defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area-specific level, Assoc. Phy(s) field for the location defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field of the current device. The user can enter a location partial name in the box and press ENTER or click the Search drop-down arrow to search for a specific location as shown below.

Ask User – Displays the patients for the physician identified by the user. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician’s Individual or Group list defined in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (that is, Personal List or Group List).

The physician search box displays above the tabs to the right of the Physician Location Screen as shown below. When the Search button is clicked, the System displays a list of physicians. The user can enter a physician ID/partial name in the box and press Enter or click OK.

Clicking the Search arrow in the search box displays the unit and/or department locations.



Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Location Screen according to the following criteria:

Only patients in beds – Indicates the System displays only patients who are checked into beds when the Data field, Only Patients in Beds? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Visit Location – Indicates the System displays patients for the defined physician who are assigned to the location defined in the Data field, Location subfield of this lookup type. The System displays only those patients who have the selected visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

When the Location subfield is defined as ask user, a Combo Box displays within the Patient List application. The user can enter a visit location partial name and press ENTER or click OK. The System then displays a list of locations matching the search criteria and the user can select the appropriate location.

Specified visit type/status – Indicates the System displays patients for the specified physician according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type.

The Physician Location Screen can display the following information:





Clicking the search box displays a list of physicians to select.



The patients display under one of the following heading bars based on the patient’s status as shown in the figure below:





Capacity – Displays the capacity identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). The information is sorted by a capacity header bar that also displays within the Capacity column as shown below. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected (see Reassign… option on page 93. (Replaces the Physician column on the Physician Location Screen.)




Stat/ASAP – Displays the number of Stat/ASAP items for the patient. Stat/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected. (Replaces the Review column on the Physician Location Screen.)


Heading Bar

Capacity Header Bar

Capacity Colu



Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. In addition, this column replaces the Action column when defined as yes. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column

When this lookup type is defined, the default lists of patients display on separate tabs. The user can choose another lookup type from the drop down box located above the first tab, with the group, coverage and resident service patient lists displaying on separate tabs. The following tabs and buttons can display on the Physician Location Screen:

Initial Tab – Displays the list of patients defined for the physician preferences in the Data field, Physician subfield of this table. This tab reflects the name of the lookup type defined in this table (Example: Physician Location). The following buttons can display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Location Screen.


When multiple reports are defined, the Physician Census Report button displays a drop-down list of options. When the user clicks the drop-down arrow, the reports display for selection as shown below.




Clicking the drop-down arrow can display a multiple list of reports for selection.








Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Location Screen.



Change Coverage List – Allows a physician to make changes to his/her coverage list. This button displays only on the Coverage tab when the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield is defined as no. Clicking this button displays a pop-up window that contains radio buttons and search options to make changes to the coverage list as shown below.




Group Tab – Displays the patients assigned to any member of the physician's group, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician. This tab displays when a group is defined for the physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Provider Group field, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. The following buttons display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician's list of patients. The report(s) is initiated when clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha Screen.




Resident Service Tab – Displays the patients associated with a specific resident service. This tab displays when the lookup type is defined with Resident Service. As with the physician lookup types, the resident service lookup type can display patients in alpha, location, or alpha/location order. The following buttons and options display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician's list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha Screen.






Filter Options – Displays a drop-down box to select patients from a specific resident service. Resident Services are defined in the Resident Service menu function, Resident Service(s) push parameter as shown below. The System defaults to all assigned services.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange


Line Type (Continued)





Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the lookup type that determines the type of list that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as physician location, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a specific physician in location order.

Input Defining this subfield as physician location, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

PhysicianLocationOnly Patients In Beds?Display Lifecare Patients?Partial Name Search?Patient Access TypeVisit Type/Status ListPTID Visit Type/Status ListAllow Signout/Reassign?Disable Coverage Edits?Split Action Item Counts?

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified physician in location order.

Impact ofChange


Physician


Input Provider ID


Single selection








(C) Current User


(U) User Asked

Expand


System Use Provider ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified provider when this lookup type option is accessed. The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. Causes the Discharge Display subfield to display when a discharge status is defined in the Visit Type/Status List field of this lookup type.

The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Patients display on the user side when the current user meets the following criteria:




(U) User Asked – Displays the patients for the physician defined by the user. The physician’s individual list or group list display depends on the definition of the physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Only those employees who meet the following criteria can be identified:







Impact ofChange


Discharge Display






System Use All discharged visits – Displays all discharged visits for the assigned physician on the Physician Location Screen.

Display discharged visits with queue entries only – Displays only those patients on the Physician Location Screen with discharged visits assigned to the physician who have entries in the review queue.

Impact ofChange


Location





(U) Ask User











User Asked – Displays only those patients for the location defined by the user for the assigned physician.

(C) Currently Selected Location – Allows the user to define this field using the location level initially entered, rather than selecting a lower level. For example, a user might initially enter the location 5 North, causing the System to display the room numbers 5101 and 5102 for selection. Clicking (C) Currently Selected Location defines this field as 5 North.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No


Single selection

Links from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”)NOTE: The Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield, must be defined as active for the visit type(s) to display patients checked into beds.

Bed Only?



Defaults to no




Impact ofChange


Location (Continued)





Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Displays the patients with queue entries for items stored on the patient’s lifecare visit for the assigned physician (Example: A prescription order to sign). Lifecare visit patients display with a visit type of Active LV.


Impact ofChange





Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



Impact ofChange


Patient Access Type






Defaults to all patients.






Impact ofChange





Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Patient Access Type



Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange









Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show




Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

System Use Displays a separate patient list for use when the user enters a patient identification at the transaction line on the Physician Location Screen. When this subfield is not defined, only those patients with a visit type(s) and status(s) that match the Visit Type/Status List subfield are available for selection.

For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt from the Physician Location Screen, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.


Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign his/her patients during/at the end of a shift. Causes the following buttons to display on the Physician Location Screen:



Attending

Consulting


Resident

NOTE: The capacities must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ̂ aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents subfile. For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.


Impact ofChange







Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



Impact ofChange



Chapter 8

Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe physician alpha/location lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a specific physician or physician group, depending on how the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Patient Display Default field is defined. This lookup type is similar to the physician alpha and physician location lookup types, except the decision whether to display the patients in alphabetical or location order is defined individually for each physician. The patient information that displays depends on the data definitions that are defined in this table.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha/Location Lookup

Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha/Location Lookup Type:

Area Table, âfaEmployee/Provider Table, âeVisit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”)

Department Usage Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to display patients they are responsible for in alpha or location order. In addition, it provides the means to access other patient identification groups, such as visit type(s)/status(es), without going to another menu point.




Patient Identification (Javaview)When this option is selected to identify a patient in the Patient Identification menu function (Javaview), the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined in the figures below. The Physician subfield defines the physician for whom the patients display.





Specific physician – Displays the Physician Alpha/Location Screen for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the Physician Alpha/Location Screen for the physician currently signed on to the System. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

Terminal Default – Displays the Physician Alpha/Location Screen for the identified physician based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

Ask User – Prompts for a physician to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the physician using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the Physician Alpha/Location Screen for that physician.




Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen according to the following criteria:




The Physician Alpha/Location Screen can display the following information:





The patients can display under one of the following headings based on the patient’s status:







Capacity – Displays the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). This column displays when the (S) Sign Out and (N) Reassign options are selected. In addition, the Capacity column replaces the Physician column on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.

Action – Displays the number of action items in the review queue for the patient. Action items are orders that require renewal or signature, attestation deficiencies, results to be completed by the physician, or result verification items. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as no and the Physician subfield is defined as current user or a specific physician, replacing the Sign/Oth column.

Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, and the Physician subfield is defined as current user or a specific physician, replacing the Action column. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column

Review – Displays the number of review items in the review queue for the patient. Review items are results that need to be reviewed by the physician. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.

Def/Del – Displays the number of deficiencies and delinquencies for the patient. When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definitions Screen, Deficiency Tracking Definition field is defined as yes for any visit type, the System replaces the Physician Alpha/Location Screen, STAT/ASAP (orders or results that require immediate attention) column with this column. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.

STAT/ASAP – Displays the number of STAT/ASAP items for the patient. STAT/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention. This column displays only when the Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user or a specific physician.





The following processing options can display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen:


(G) Group – Displays the Physician Alpha/Location Screen for all the patients being seen by any member of the physician’s group, either on an attending or consulting basis. This processing option displays when a group is defined for the physician and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. Physician groups are defined in the Physician Group Table, ^aet(“pg”), and linked to a physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Provider Group field.


(L) Personal List – Displays the patients on the physician’s personal list (i.e., a group of patients to whom the physician is not assigned but would like to track). This processing option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Data Screen, Allow Phys. Personal List Processing? field is defined as yes, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician.




Defining the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield of the lookup type as yes causes the System to disable the ability to edit the coverage list for the physician, however, the user can click the (C) Coverage button to view the list.




(N) Reassign – Allows a physician to reassign a patient(s) to another physician. Displays a list of patients to whom the physician is assigned. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. The System prompts to select a patient to reassign or choose from the following processing options:

(A) Attending – Reassigns all patients for whom the physician is the attending to a new attending physician. Displays a list of physicians including the physicians who are in the same group as the user, additional responsible physicians, consultants, and/or residents. The System prompts to enter the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are to be reassigned. The new physician can be identified using standard employee identification methods.

The System changes the service (i.e., the attending physician) for each patient to whom the original physician is assigned. The System processes the patients at the same time, stepping the user through the assignment list. Once a new physician is identified, the System replaces the current physician’s name with the new physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function.




Enter patient ID – Allows the user to identify a patient and select a visit. The System can display one of the following patient populations when a patient identification is entered from the text-box prompt on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen:




No patient lookup – Does not display the patient identification prompt on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.

The capacities (i.e., attending, consulting, etc.) must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”). For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.




Print – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.



The Patient List application utilizes the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), to display the Navigator Menu structure. This information can be changed by clicking the down arrow in the Navigator Header Bar as shown below. For example, in figure below, the default lookup type is Physician Alpha/Location. Clicking the arrow in the Navigator Header Bar causes the System to display a list of additional lookup type options (Example: Physician Location).


Navigator Header Bar



Once the Patient List application has been launched, the System displays the Patient List Physician Alpha/Location Screen as shown below.

The screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield is defined. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the patients for the identified physician. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

Current User – Displays the patients for the physician currently signed on to the System. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

Terminal Default – Displays the patients for the identified physician based on the terminal default definition. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).




The search box displays above the tabs on the right side of the Physician Alpha/Location Screen. When the down arrow is clicked on the drop-down box, the System displays a list of units and/or departments belonging to the physician or physician group defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area-specific level, Assoc. Phy(s) field for the location defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field of the current device. The user can enter a location partial name in the box and press Enter or click the Search drop-down arrow to search for a specific location as shown below.

Ask User – Displays the patients for the physician identified by the user. The display of patients depends on the definition for the physician’s Individual or Group list defined in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field (i.e., Personal List or Group List).

The physician search box displays above the tabs to the right of the Physician Alpha/Location Screen as shown below. When the Search button is clicked, the System displays a list of physicians. The user can enter a physician ID/partial name in the box and press ENTER or click OK.

Physician Alpha/Location Tabs

Clicking the Search arrow in the search box displays the unit and/or department locations.



Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen according to the following criteria:

Only patients in beds – Indicates the System displays only patients who are checked into beds when the Data field, Only Patients in Beds? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Visit Location – Indicates the System displays patients for the defined physician who are assigned to the location defined in the Data field, Location subfield of this lookup type. The System displays only those patients who have the selected visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

When the Location subfield is defined as ask user, a Combo Box displays within the Patient List application. The user can enter a visit location partial name and press ENTER or click OK. The System then displays a list of locations matching the search criteria and the user can select the appropriate location.

Specified visit type/status – Indicates the System displays patients for the specified physician according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type.

The Physician Alpha/Location Screen can display the following information:





Clicking the search box displays a list of physicians to select.



The patients display under one of the following heading bars based on the patient’s status as shown below:

Active in Bed – Displays the active patients who have been checked into a bed and are assigned to the specified physician.




Capacity – Displays the capacity identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are assigned (Example: attending, consulting, resident). The information is sorted by a capacity header bar that also displays within the Capacity column as shown below. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected (see Reassign… option on page 120. (Replaces the Physician column on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.)




Stat/ASAP – Displays the number of Stat/ASAP items for the patient. Stat/ASAP items are orders or results that require immediate attention. This column displays only when the Reassign… option is selected. (Replaces the Review column on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.)


Heading Bar

Capacity Header Bar Capacity Column



Sign/Oth – Displays those items needing signatures and/or other items to be documented. This column displays only when the Data field, Split Action Item Counts? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. In addition, this column replaces the Action column when defined as yes. The System displays the following:

Sign side of column

Oth side of column

When this lookup type is defined, the default lists of patients display on separate tabs. The user can choose another lookup type from the drop down box located above the first tab, with the group, coverage and resident service patient lists displaying on separate tabs. The following tabs and buttons can display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen:

Initial Tab – Displays the list of patients defined for the physician preferences in the Data field, Physician subfield of this table. This tab reflects the name of the lookup type defined in this table (Example: Physician Alpha/Location). The following buttons can display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.


When multiple reports are defined, the Physician Census Report button displays a drop-down list of options. When the user clicks the drop-down arrow, the reports display for selection as shown below.




Clicking the drop-down arrow can display a multiple list of reports for selection.








Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician’s list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.



Change Coverage List – Allows a physician to make changes to his/her coverage list. This button displays only on the Coverage tab when the Data field, Disable Coverage Edits? subfield is defined as no. Clicking this button displays a pop-up window that contains radio buttons and search options to make changes to the coverage list as shown below.




Group Tab – Displays the patients assigned to any member of the physician's group, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician. This tab displays when a group is defined for the physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Provider Group field, and the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined as current user, ask user or specific physician. The following button displays on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician's list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.




Resident Service Tab – Displays the patients associated with a specific resident service. This tab displays when the lookup type is defined with Resident Service. As with the physician lookup types, the resident service lookup type can display patients in alpha, location, or alpha/location order. The following options display on this screen:

Physician Census Report – Generates the Physician Census Report(s) for a physician's list of patients. The report(s) is initiated by clicking this button. When a report is not defined, this button does not display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.The physician census report is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Reg/ADT Reports and Message Definitions Screen, Physician Census Report field. When a physician census report(s) is printed, it is routed



to the print queue defined for the terminal being used. The default print queue for the terminal is linked to the printer group defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Printer Group field.When multiple reports are defined, the Physician Census Report button displays a drop-down list of options. When the user clicks the drop-down arrow, the reports display for selection.


Filter Options – Displays a drop-down box to select patients from a specific resident service. Resident Services are defined in the Resident Service menu function, Resident Service(s) push parameter as shown below. The System defaults to all assigned services.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange





Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the lookup type that determines the type of list that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as physician alpha/location, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a specific physician in alpha or location order.

Input Defining this subfield as physician alpha/location, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

PhysicianLocationOnly Patients In Beds?Display Lifecare Patients?Partial Name Search?Patient Access TypeVisit Type/Status ListPTID Visit Type/Status ListAllow Signout/Reassign?Disable Coverage Edits?Split Action Item Counts?

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified physician in alpha or location order.

Impact ofChange


Physician


Input Provider ID


Single selection








System Use (C) Current User


(U) User Asked

Expand


Provider ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified provider when this lookup type option is accessed. The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. Causes the Discharge Display subfield to display when a discharge status is defined in the Visit Type/Status List field of this lookup type. The physician’s Personal List or Group List display depends on the definition of the specific physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Patients display on the user side when the current user meets the following criteria:




(U) User Asked – Displays the patients for the physician defined by the user. The physician’s individual list or group list display depends on the definition of the physician’s application user profile in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Only those employees who meet the following criteria can be identified:




Impact ofChange





Discharge Display






System Use All discharged visits – Displays all discharged visits for the assigned physician on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen.

Display discharged visits with queue entries only – Displays only those patients on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen with discharged visits assigned to the physician who have entries in the review queue.

Impact ofChange


Location





(U) Ask User










(U) User Asked – Displays only those patients for the location defined by the user for the assigned physician.


Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No


Single selection

Links from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”)NOTE: The Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield, must be defined as active for the visit type(s) to display patients checked into beds.

Bed Only?



Defaults to no




Impact ofChange







Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Displays the patients with queue entries for items stored on the patient’s lifecare visit for the assigned physician (Example: a prescription order to sign). Lifecare visit patients display with a visit type of Active LV.


Impact ofChange





Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



Impact ofChange


Patient Access Type






Defaults to all patients.





(P) Only Previous Assignments – Indicates the System invokes a recent assignment check and when a partial name is entered, only those patients for whom the physician has been assigned as an attending or consulting physician within the past year (365 days), or those patients who are currently assigned to the physician can be selected. All other patients who match the partial name are unavailable for selection. When a patient identification method other than a partial name is used (Example: visit number, social security number, etc.), a check is invoked to ensure that the user had a previous assignment to the patient within the last year. When the check fails, an error message displays.

Impact ofChange





Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Patient Access Type (Continued)



Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange









Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge



Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

System Use Displays a separate patient list for use when the user enters a patient identification at the transaction line on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen. When this subfield is not defined, only those patients with a visit type(s) and status(s) that match the Visit Type/Status List subfield are available for selection.

For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt from the Physician Alpha/Location Screen, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.


Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no




System Use Yes – Allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign his/her patients during/at the end of a shift. Causes the following buttons to display on the Physician Alpha/Location Screen:



Attending

Consulting


Resident

NOTE: The capacities must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents subfile. For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.


Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no


Allow Signout/Reassign? (Continued)




Impact ofChange


Split Action Item Counts? (Continued)


Chapter 9

Service Alpha Lookup Type

OverviewThe service alpha lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a specific service/specialty, in alphabetical order. Patients are assigned to a service, based on the responsible physician’s specialty, defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Specialty(s) field.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Service Alpha Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Service Alpha Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Service Alpha Lookup Type:

Physician Service/Department/Specialty Table, aet(“ps”)

Department Usage Ancillary DepartmentsAncillary departments use this lookup type to identify patients who are scheduled for various service/specialties (Example: patient’s scheduled for special imaging in radiology).

Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to view patients who have a specific service/specialty (Example: patient’s scheduled for surgery).



DescriptionWhen this lookup type option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Service subfield of this table is defined. The Service subfield can be defined as follows:

Specialty – Displays the Service Alpha Screen for the defined specialty.

Ask User – Displays a list of specialty options and prompts for one to be selected. Once a specialty is selected, the System displays the Service Alpha Screen.

When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this table is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified after a service has been specified. The System displays the Service Alpha Screen with the patients who match the entered identification and are assigned to the specified service/specialty.

The Service Alpha Screen displays the following information as shown below:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated when necessary.








Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's responsible physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

The following options are available from the Service Alpha Screen:

Select patient – Allows another menu function or menu list to be accessed.

Scan bar code – Allows the user to scan a bar code to identify a patient. This option displays only when the associated Patient Identification menu function, Visit Flags push parameter, Scanable PTID? field is defined as yes.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange





Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as service alpha, which display the patients for a specific service/specialty in alphabetical order.

Input Defining this subfield as service alpha, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

ServicePartial Name Search?Visit Type/Status List

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified service/specialty in alphabetical order.

Impact ofChange


Service

Purpose Defines a specified service/specialty that determines the patients who display during a patient search.

Input Select specialty

Single selection

Links from the Physician Service/Department/Specialty Table, aet(“ps”)

(U) Ask User


System Use Select specialty – Displays the patients associated with the defined specialty when this lookup type is used.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to identify a service/specialty when this lookup type is accessed.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows patients to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter patient ID prompt prior to displaying the Service Alpha Screen.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. The System automatically displays the patients assigned to the service/specialty.

Impact ofChange





Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used to identify a patient(s). This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as active inpatients who are scheduled for surgery.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge



Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange




Chapter 10

Service Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe service location lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a specific service/specialty, in location order. Patients are assigned to a service, based on the responsible physician’s specialty, defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Specialty(s) field.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Service Location Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Service Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Service Location Lookup Type:

Physician Service/Department/Specialty Table, aet(“ps”)

Department Usage Ancillary DepartmentsAncillary departments use this lookup type to identify patients by service location who are scheduled for various service/specialties (Example: Patient’s scheduled for special imaging in radiology).

Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to view patients by service location who have a specific service/specialty (Example: Patient’s scheduled for surgery).



DescriptionWhen this lookup type option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Service subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Service subfield can be defined as follows:

Specialty – Displays the Service Location Screen for the patients associated with the defined specialty location.

Ask User – Displays a list of specialty options and prompts for one to be selected. Once a specialty is selected, the System displays the Service Location Screen.

The following information displays on the Service Location Screen as shown below:









Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's responsible physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required




Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as service location, which displays the patients assigned to a specific service/ specialty, in location order.

Input Defining this subfield as service location, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

ServiceVisit Type/Status List

Required

Display Text (Continued)



System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specific service/specialty.

Impact ofChange


Service

Purpose Defines a specified service/specialty that determines the patients who display during a patient search.

Input Select specialty

Single selection

Links from the Physician Service/Department/Specialty Table, aet(“ps”)

(U) Ask User


System Use Select specialty – Displays the patients associated with the defined specialty when this lookup type is used.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to identify a service/specialty when this lookup type is accessed.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used to identify a patient(s). This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as active inpatients who are scheduled for surgery.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show




Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange




Chapter 11

Religion Lookup Type

OverviewThe religion alpha lookup type is used to identify a patient by a religion. Religions are defined in the Religion/Church Table, ^rt(“rc”). A patient's religion is defined during registration processing in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Religion data element.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Religion Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Religion Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Religion Lookup Type:

Religion/Church Table, ^rt(“rc”)

Department Usage Pastoral CarePastoral Care uses this lookup type to create religion-specific lists of patients for visiting religious officials, allowing the officials to identify and visit patients of appropriate religious affiliation. These lists can be further divided alphabetically by first letter of patient last name, or by a partial name search.

All DepartmentsWhen the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield in this lookup type is defined as yes, all departments can use it to access a patient record by using both religion and partial name search.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Religion subfield of this table is defined. The Religion subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific religion – Displays the Religion Alpha Screen for the specified religion as shown below.

(U) Ask User – Displays a list of religion options and prompts for one to be selected. Once a religion is selected, the System displays the Religion Alpha Screen as shown below.

The Religion Alpha Screen displays a list of patients who match the specified religion. The patients display in alphabetical order. Since patients can have more than one visit, they can display multiple times on this screen, once for each visit. When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Primary Name With Alias? field is defined as yes, the System displays the patient’s primary name in parentheses following the alias name [Example: Smith, Anna (Jones, Anna)]. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen.

The following information displays on the Religion Alpha Screen:


With QuadraMed® CPR Character User Interface (UI) revision 1.6, the user can move the mouse pointer over the alias name and the patient’s primary name displays in a tool tip box.





Visit Number – Displays the patient's visit number.



Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's attending physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.


Selection Screen Line Definition Level

The following fields display on the Table Builder Definition Screen for the Selection Screen Line Definition level:

Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange





Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This field should be defined as religion alpha, which displays the patient(s) defined for a specified religion.

Input Defining this subfield as religion alpha causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

ReligionPartial Name Search?Visit Type/Status List

System Use Displays all patients defined with a specified religion in the database.

Displays all patients who meet the criteria in alphabetical order.

Impact ofChange


Religion

Purpose Defines the religion used to determine the patients who display during a patient search.

Input Single selection

Links from the Religion/Church Table, ^rt(“rc”)

(U) Ask User


System Use Displays those patients who have the specified religion defined, when a patient search is performed using this lookup type. A patient's religion is defined during registration processing in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Religion data element.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to select the religion when a patient search is performed using this lookup type.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient, in addition to the pre-defined or selected religion.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no


No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search.

Impact ofChange





Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient, in addition to the pre-defined or selected religion.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no


No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) of patients who can be accessed when this lookup type option is used to search for patients. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as active inpatients.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required

System Use Allows only the patients who have the specified visit type and status to be accessed when this lookup type option is used to search for patients.

(C) Clear – Clears all previous selections in this subfield.

Impact ofChange



Chapter 12

Resident Service Lookup Type

OverviewThe resident service lookup type is used to identify the patients assigned to a specified resident service (Example: Emergency Staff, Pediatric Services).

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Resident Service Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Resident Service Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Resident Service Lookup Type:

Resident Service Table, ^aet("rs")

Department Usage CardiologyCardiology uses this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for Cardiology.

ClinicsClinics use this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for Clinic.

EmergencyEmergency uses this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for Emergency.

Medical StaffThe medical staff uses this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for various departments.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Resident Service subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Resident Service subfield can be defined as follows:

Resident service – Displays the Resident Service Screen listing the patients assigned to the specified resident service.

Current User – Displays the Resident Service Screen for the physician currently signed on to the System. The physician must have an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/ Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field. When the Expand button is clicked, the list of Resident Service Options display for selection. Resident services are defined in the Resident Service Table, âet(“rs”).

Ask User – Prompts for a resident service to be selected from the Resident Service Options defined. Once a resident service is identified, the System displays the Resident Service Screen for that service.

When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this table is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified after a service has been specified. The System displays the Resident Service Screen with the patients who match the entered identification and assigned to the selected resident service.

Once a resident service is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Resident Service Screen according to the following criteria:

Resident service display – Displays the patients in alphabetical order.

Location – Displays the patients in location order.

Alpha/Location – Displays the patients in alphabetical or location order.

Specified visit type/status – Displays patients for the defined resident service according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield.

The following information displays on the Resident Service Screen as shown below:

RadiologyRadiology uses this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for Radiology.

SurgerySurgery uses this lookup type to view patients assigned to the resident service for Surgery.









Physician – Displays the short name of the resident service (if the resident service is a physician, the System displays the physician’s short name). The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

The following processing options are available from the Resident Service Screen:

Select patient – Allows the menu function or menu list linked to this lookup type to be accessed. The System prompts the user Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when the Data field, Physician Assignment Prompt? subfield is defined as yes. The prompt displays only when the following occur:




The user has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option.

The System defaults to no at the prompt. When the user answers yes, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list.

When the user accessing the patient is a resident (that is, has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Residents employee type category option), the System places the resident’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Resident(s) field and adds the patient to the resident’s list.

Print – Prints the resident service census report(s) defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Reg/ADT Reports and Message Definitions Screen, Physician Census Report field.


Selection Screen Line Definition Level

The following fields display on the Table Builder Definition Screen for the Selection Screen Line Definition level:

Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange





Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as resident service, which display the patients for a specific specialty.

Input Defining this subfield as resident service, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Resident ServiceResident Service DisplayPartial Name Search?Visit Type/Status ListPhysician Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified resident service.

Impact ofChange


Resident Service

Purpose Defines a specified resident service that determines the patients who display during a patient search.

Input Resident Service

Single selection

Links from the Resident Service Table, âet("rs")

(C) Current User

(U) User Asked

Defaults to user asked

System Use Resident service – Displays the patients associated with the specified resident service when this lookup type is used.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the physician currently signed on to the System. The physician must have an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts the user to identify a resident service when this lookup type is accessed.

Impact ofChange




Resident Service Display

Purpose Defines the order in which the patients display on the Resident Service Screen.

Input (R ) Resident Service Patient Display Of Alpha

(L) Location

(B) Alpha/Location

System Use (R ) Resident Service Patient Display Of Alpha – Displays the patients in alphabetical order.

(L) Location – Displays the patients in location order.

(B) Alpha/Location – Displays the patients in alphabetical or location order, depending on how the Applications User Profile Table, ̂ ap, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Patient Display Default field is defined.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no


No – Indicates the System automatically displays the patients assigned to the resident service.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as active inpatients who are associated with the surgery service.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show



Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required






Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System prompts the physician to assign him/herself to the patient once the patient is selected from the patient list. The prompt displays when the following conditions are true:


The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

No – Indicates the System does not prompt the physician to assign him/herself to the patient.

Impact ofChange




Chapter 13

Visit w/Bed Activation Time Lookup Type

OverviewThe visit with bed by activation time lookup type is used to identify those patients who have an active visit(s) of the specified visit type(s) and who have been checked into a bed. The patients are sorted by visit activation time. Only non-inpatient visits display.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit with Bed by Activation Time

Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit with Bed by Activation Time Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Visit with Bed by Activation Time Lookup Type:

System Parameter Table, ^%zReg/ADT System Parameters Subfile

Department Usage EmergencyEmergency uses this lookup type to locate the patient(s) checked into a bed who is next in line for service.

Clinic(s)Clinics use this lookup type to determine the short stay patient(s) checked into a bed who is next in line for service.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the System displays the Visit with Bed by Activation Time Screen as shown below. The population of patients that displays depends on how the Data field, Allowable Visit Type(s) subfield of this lookup type is defined.

The following information displays on the Visit with Bed by Activation Time Screen:

Activation Time – Displays the date and time the visit was activated.

Location – Displays the patient's home location (that is, bed).

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The format displayed depends on the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated when necessary.








Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data




Primary Lookup Type


Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This field should be defined as visit with bed by activation time, which displays active patient(s) with a specified visit type(s) checked into a bed.

Input Defining this subfield as visit with bed by activation time causes the Allowable Visit Type(s) subfield to display for definition.

Required

System Use Displays the patients who have an active visit(s) of the specified visit type(s) and who have been checked into a bed.

Impact ofChange


Allowable Visit Type(s)

Purpose Defines the population of patients who display when this lookup type is used to identify patients.



Input Multiple selection

Emergency

Outpatient

Clinic

Short Stay

NOTE: Only those visit types that have the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Bed Control Parameters Screen, Bed Control Information field, Allow Beds? subfield defined as yes display for selection.

System Use Displays those patients who have active non-inpatient visits of the specified visit type(s) and who have been checked into a bed. The patients are sorted by visit activation time.

Impact of Change


Allowable Visit Type(s) (Continued)


Chapter 14

Management Queue: Overview

OverviewWhen the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Selection Screen Line Definition level, Data field, Primary Lookup Type subfield is defined as management queue, the user has the ability to create various management queues that can be utilized in the healthcare facility. Management queues are customized, database-defined patient lists that allow an exact portion of the patient population to be accessed. Work for a particular employee group or individual can be organized in a management queue. Management queues are comprised of management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level. A management queue group consists of an object type. An object type is used to determine the patient population that displays within the management queue. For example, a list of patients with visits that need insurance verification, or a list of patients with events that need processing can display. A user can define a management queue group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, Object Type field by selecting one of the following object types:

EventInsuranceOrderPatientVisitVisit location

Once the user defines a management queue group (by selecting an object type), a management queue can be defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile. This subfile determines the manner in which the management queue operates (Example: whether a patient can be added manually to the queue, whether entries to the queue are retained after processing, or the sort type). The sort type defines the method used to sort and display the entries in the management queue. For example, the insurance object type contains a preadmit time sort type. A management queue can be created with a list of patients who have visits that have been pre-admitted and need insurance verification. Each object type contains one or more sort types. Sort types for each object type are listed in the Description section of this document.



Once a user defines the management queue group and management queue, a process for that management queue can be defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile and specific process(es) can be performed for the patients in the management queue. For example, a process screen can be defined to allow a user to perform a pre-authorization of a patient visit, or authorize insurance coverage for days remaining in the patient’s hospitalization.

Once the management group/queue and its related processes are defined, a management queue can be linked to the Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Selection Screen Line Definition level, Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield. For complete information regarding management queues, refer to Chapter 1, Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv").

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), management queue lookup type:object types and sort types, refer to Chapter 15, Mgmt Q: Event Object Type through Chapter 20, Mgmt Q: Visit Location Object Type.

DescriptionThe following is a description of the object types and sort types used to determine the patient population that displays within the management queue:

Event Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Event object type displays a list of procedure events in the management queue as the result of one the following:

Events meeting the criteria for follow-up evaluation and processing defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for an event to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue.

Events have been copied to the queue destination in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Copy Destination(s) field.

This object type can be used in the following situations:

Reviewing and processing culture events meeting various infection control criteria. For example, a culture result of Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus aureus may be routed to the management queue for follow-up by infection control. From the management queue, the culture may be reviewed and the follow-up process documented.

Patients cannot be manually added to an event object type management queue.



Reviewing and processing anatomic pathology events meeting quality assurance review or tumor board review criteria. For example, a surgical pathologist can compare the correlation between the frozen and final diagnosis of a surgical pathology specimen.

The event object type consists of the following sort types:

Department number

Event time

Chronological

Reverse chronological

Patient alpha

Specimen number

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Event Object Type, refer to Chapter 15, Mgmt Q: Event Object Type.

Insurance Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Insurance object type displays a list of patients with visits that have an insurance(s) defined. Insurances can be defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Insurance/Payor data element and can default into the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Insurance/Payor data element. Patient visits can display in an insurance object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient’s insurance(s) meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and linked to a management queue in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.

Patients who have been copied to the queue destination in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Copy Destination(s) field. Entries in a management queue can be copied to another management queue as a result of management queue processing.

The patient has been manually added to the management queue. Patients can be added to a management queue when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes.

This object type allows a user (Example: utilization review or managed care staff) to access insurance information for the patient’s visit. For example, a management queue can be constructed for patients who have a pending inpatient visit scheduled and an insurance that requires pre-authorization. When a visit is created that meets these criteria, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue. The user can then access the management queue and pre-authorize the patient’s visit before the patient is admitted.



The insurance object type consists of the following sort types:Discharge timeDischarge time order by dayHome locationInsurancePatient alphaPreadmit timePreadmit time order by dayReview agencyVisit timeVisit time order by day

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Insurance Object Type, refer to Chapter 16, Mgmt Q: Insurance Object Type.

Order Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Order Object Type displays a list of patients who have orders requiring authorization. The order object type allows the user to obtain authorization for orders (that is, referrals, diagnostic procedures, and home health visits, and so on) for patients prior to a procedure being performed. In addition, a user can construct an order management queue to monitor the completion status of order authorization for specific patients, within a certain visit location, for a specific order generator, or for a certain insurance or benefit plan. The order object type management queue ensures order authorizations are processed in a timely manner. Patients/orders can display in an order object type management queue as a result of one the following:

The patient has an order(s) requiring authorization.


Order Authorization ProcessInsurances for a patient can be defined during registration processing in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Insurance/Payor data element and can default into the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Insurance/Payor data element. Patients display in the queue when they have an insurance defined for the visit and an order is placed that requires authorization. The System determines whether authorization is required for a procedure based on

Management queues with an order object type cannot be linked to the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”).



the ordered procedure and/or the patient’s visit type. In order for the authorization orders to display in the order management queue, the user must define the Procedure Table, ^t, Order Information Screen, Authorization Status field with the appropriate management group/queue/sort type. During order entry, the System defaults the authorization status defined in the Procedure Table, ^t, Order Information Screen, Authorization Status field into the field created from the Order Entry Profile Table, ^nt(“op”), Authorization Status data element. If the authorization defaults to required, the user can edit the authorization status to not required during order entry. When the authorization status defaults to not required, the field is unavailable for selection.

On-line and Manual AuthorizationsOrders can be authorized during order entry and routed to an order management queue through an on-line or manual process. The process type is defined for an order management queue in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Process Type field. The process types for authorizations can be defined as follows:

On-line – An on-line process type indicates the authorization is obtained through an on-line interface. The interface electronically provides information regarding the authorization status of a procedure. During order entry, if the authorization status is required for the procedure, and the management queue is defined as on-line, the System attempts to obtain authorization from the on-line system defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Authorization Interface field.

During this time, the System displays an authorization analysis message. If the authorization is received within five seconds, the System displays an authorization obtained message and prompts whether to print a notification. If the authorization is not received within five seconds, the System displays a pending authorization message. Regardless of the status received from the on-line interface, the System routes all orders to the defined management queue for review. Once an approval is received for an order in the management queue, the System changes the authorization status to approved. The authorization code, insurance, and number of events that have been approved can be viewed by clicking (H) View History from the Management Queue and Management Queue Process Screens.

When no interface is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Authorization Interface field, the System displays a System Unavailable message during order entry.

Manual – A manual process type indicates the System routes the order to the defined management queue for manual processing. The authorization status can be updated using either the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Authorization Status or Events data element during management queue processing.

The order object type consists of the following sort types:Authorization statusOrder generatorOrder time



Patient alphaPrimary insurance, benefit plan order timePrimary insurance, order timePrimary visit location, order time

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Order Object Type, refer to Chapter 17, Mgmt Q: Order Object Type.

Patient Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Patient Object Type displays a list of patients according to pre-defined criteria. Patients can display in a patient object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), for the management queue. In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and linked to a management queue in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.



This object type can be used to set up a management queue with criteria defined to identify patients for various purposes (Example: registration processing, utilization review, and so on).

The patient object type consists of the patient alpha sort type. For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Patient Object Type, refer to Chapter 18, Mgmt Q: Patient Object Type.

Visit Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Visit object type displays a list of patient visits. Patient visits can display in a visit object type management queue as a result of one or more of the following:



The patient visit meets criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and management queues are linked to the criteria definition in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.

The patient visit has been copied to the queue destination in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Copy Destination(s) field. Entries in a management queue can be copied to another management queue as a result of management queue processing.

The patient visit has been manually added to the management queue. Patients can be added to a management queue when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes.

The patient has a visit type defined to always perform abstracting in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definition Screen, Abstract States field.

The visit object type/sort types can be used to define management queues in the following ways:

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue to edit or process a patient’s visit information. For example, the Managed Care department in a facility can review and process a patient’s insurance verification information for a visit. When a visit is created that meets the criteria, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue. The user can then access the management queue, and perform management queue processing (that is, a process defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile) to verify insurance coverage. Once coverage is verified, the patient can be deleted from the queue as a result of that process.

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue that lists patients in the emergency room according to their triage acuity levels. A patient can be triaged or classified during visit or triage processing, according to the severity (that is, acuity) of the complaint (that is, crisis, emergent, urgent, non-urgent). Treatment of patients with severe symptoms can be expedited and patients can be re-classified within the management queue as their symptoms change. Patients display in visit activation order making it easier for the emergency room staff to determine the wait time of the patient. A triage acuity management queue can be created with the visit:triage acuity object type:sort type pair.

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue that contains visits that have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted. Abstracting is the practice of medical record departments that are required to extract data from the medical record for the purposes of compiling statistics and indexes, as well as reporting aggregate data to state

This definition is required, in addition to the visit meeting the criteria defined in Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), when using the visit object type to create a management queue that contains visits that need to be abstracted.



and federal agencies. A master abstracting queue can be created to allow the user to process patients or copy them to an individual queue for processing. An abstracting management queue can be created when the visit object type management queue is defined with the following sort types:Abstracting statusMedical record numberVisit numberVisit statusVisit type

When these sort types are utilized, the System displays an Abstract header on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).

The visit object type consists of the following sort types:Abstracting statusDischarge time Discharge time order by dayHome locationMedical record numberPatient alphaPreadmit timePreadmit time order by dayPrimary insurancePrimary insurance, review agencyTriage acuityVisit numberVisit statusVisit timeVisit time order by dayVisit type

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Visit Object Type, refer to Chapter 19, Mgmt Q: Visit Object Type.

Visit Location Object TypeThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Visit Location object type displays a list of patients with non-closed visits who have a visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.



Patients can display in a visit location object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and management queues are linked to the criteria definition in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.



This object type allows a user to define a management queue to edit or process a patient’s visit information according to visit location. For example, the Utilization Review department can review and process a patient’s insurance authorization information for a visit. A management queue can be defined for case processing for a specific visit location. When a visit is created that meets the criteria for visit location, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue. The user can then access the management queue and process and/or close the patient’s utilization review case.

The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:

Primary insurance

Primary insurance, review agency

Visit location patient alpha

Visit location time order

For complete information regarding Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Visit Location Object Type, refer to Chapter 20, Mgmt Q: Visit Location Object Type.


Chapter 15

Mgmt Q: Event Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Event object type displays a list of procedure events in the management queue as the result of one the following:

Events meeting the criteria for follow-up evaluation and processing defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for an event to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue.

Events have been copied to the queue destination in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Copy Destination(s) field.

This object type can be used in the following situations:

Reviewing and processing culture events meeting various infection control criteria. For example, a culture result of Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus aureus may be routed to the management queue for follow-up by infection control. From the management queue, the culture may be reviewed and the follow-up process documented.

Reviewing and processing anatomic pathology events meeting quality assurance review or tumor board review criteria. For example, a surgical pathologist can compare the correlation between the frozen and final diagnosis of a surgical pathology specimen.

The event object type consists of the following sort types:

Department numberEvent timeChronologicalReverse chronologicalPatient alphaSpecimen number

Patients cannot be manually added to an event object type management queue.



Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has only a management group defined, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for that group and prompts for one to be identified. A management queue group can consist of the following items:

An object type defined for the groupA process(es) for the group/object typeManagement queue(s) for the group/object typeSort type(s) for the management queues

When the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has a management group and queue defined, the System displays the events for the defined management group/queue.

The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:

Event:Department NumberWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as event:department number, the System displays the Event:Department Number Management Queue Screen as shown below.

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Event object type:

Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)

Department Usage Infection Control/LaboratoryInfection control and the laboratory uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify the patients who have a specified organism or bacteria in order for epidemiology nursing staff to review a patient's chart and perform follow-up processes such as initiating precautions and reporting to state and federal disease monitoring and control agencies.

Surgical PathologySurgical pathology uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to correlate frozen section diagnosis with final diagnosis to meet JCAHP and College of American Pathologists recommendations.

For complete information regarding management queues, please refer to Chapter 1, Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv") of the Management Queue Table Reference.



This screen displays procedure events sorted according to department number. The System sorts first in alphabetical order by department prefix, then in numeric order by department number (numeric portion). If the procedure event has multiple department numbers, only the first department number for the first specimen displays. If the event does not have a department number, it displays in event time order following those events with department numbers. Only those events that meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), display.

The Event:Event Time Management Queue Screen displays the events sorted in event time order. The event time sort type can also be defined to display in chronological or reverse chronological order depending on how the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Secondary Sort Type field is defined. Chronological order displays the events in order from the earliest to the latest. Reverse chronological order displays the events in order from the latest to the earliest. Clicking (S) Sort and selecting the event time order sort type option causes the System to prompt to select a secondary sort type option of chronological or reverse chronological.Only those events that meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), display.



Event:Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as event:patient alpha, the System displays the Event:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays entries in the queue sorted in patient alphabetical order, by the patient’s last name. When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified. Only those patients with events that meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), display.



Event:Specimen NumberWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as event:specimen number, the System displays the Event:Specimen Number Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays the events sorted by specimen number, in ascending order. If an event does not have a specimen number, the System sorts chronologically by event time, and events without specimen numbers display at the end of the list. If two events have the same specimen number, they are sub-sorted based on their decisecond event time. The decisecond event time is unique for each procedure. Only those events that meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), display.



Management Queue ScreensThe following information can display on the Management Queue Screens, regardless of the sort-type variation:

Date – Displays the date of the event.

Time – Displays the time of the event.

Procedure name – Displays the name of the procedure that generated the event.

Department number – Displays the department number for the event. This information displays only on the Event:Department Number Management Queue Screen.

Specimen number – Displays the specimen number for the event. If the event has multiple specimen numbers, as would occur for a multiple collection specimen (Example: Glucose Tolerance Test), the System displays only the first specimen number. This information displays on the following screens:

Event:Event Time Management Queue Screen

Event:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen

Event:Specimen Number Management Queue Screen



Patient name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ̂ %z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. The patient's name is truncated if necessary.

Event status – Displays the status of the event (Example: partial, corrected, completed etc.).

Management Queue Expand ScreenWhen the user clicks Expand from a Management Queue Screen, the System displays the Management Queue Expand Screen as shown below.

The Management Queue Expand Screen displays the same information as the Management Queue Screen with the following exception:

Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Status column on the Management Queue Screen.



Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on a management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for event object:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. In order for the ability to enter and edit result data, review previous results, document QC data, cancel, mark for physician/nurse review, and print results, the Event Processor (Management Queue) menu function must be defined as an in-line function following the Patient Identification menu function, or as the first function in a sub-menu following the Patient Identification menu function. The select patient option only displays when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Once a patient is selected, the System can prompt Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when the following occur:

The Data field, Phys Assignment Prompt? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

The user accessing the patient is a physician and does not have a current assignment to the patient.


The System defaults to no at the Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt. When the user answers yes, the System displays the medical service options for the physician accessing the patient and prompts for selection. In addition, the System prompts whether to save any previously active orders. Once the transaction is filed, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list.


(H) View History – Allows the management queue activities defined for a patient to be viewed. When this processing option is chosen, the System displays the Management Queue History Screen as shown below.

Residents will not be added to the Attending field from this assignment prompt.



The System displays events for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), History Display Groups field. Archive events are stored against the event instead of the patient or the visit. This screen displays an audit trail of all activity for an event in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review. The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:

Procedure Name Displays the name of the procedure (Example: blood culture), centered, in regular text reverse.

Event Time Displays the time the procedure was ordered.

Event Status Displays the status of the event (Example: partial, corrected, completed, etc.).

Date/Time Displays the date/time each archive event was created or edited.

Event/Process Displays the archive event. The following archive events can display:

Process Short Name – Indicates the process short name defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Process Short Name field displays under the Event/Process Header on the Management Queue History Screen. This occurs when the visit screens defined in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), have been edited or the process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile have been documented. Process screens are defined for the management queue group.

Created – Indicates when the patient/event was initially placed in the queue. Patients/events are entered automatically as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”).



Initial Review – Indicates the information in the queue has been reviewed. This archive event is based on the review process for the management group defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile.

Group/Queue – Displays the management group/queue pair from which the processing event originated or the group/queue pair into which the created event was placed.

Edited by – Displays the short name of the employee responsible for the archive event. Employee short names are defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee Level, Employee Short Name field. The word System displays when the System is responsible for the archive event.

The (A) View All Queue Groups processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group Level, History Display Groups field. In the this field, a management queue group(s) can be defined or the System defaults to all. When an event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the selected archive event for review.

The archive event display allows the user to review selected events from the Management Queue History Screen. When multiple archive events have been created for the patient, the (P) Previous Event and (N) Next Event processing options can be chosen to view the other events. In addition, the user can click (V) View Process Screens to view the management queue process screen data associated with the process session.

Goto – Allows the user to enter an alternate date and time to display events in the management queue. This option displays for all sort types except patient alpha.

(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type defined for the object type. Clicking (S) Sort causes the System to display the hard-coded Sort Type Options defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field. Once an option is selected, the System redisplays the patients in the queue in the selected format. Only sort type options applicable to the object type of the patients can be selected. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes, and when multiple sort types are available for the object type.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. Processes within this lookup type are on the event level, rather than the visit or patient level. Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient/event is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below.



The following information can display on the Management Queue Process Screen:

A visit screen defined in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), and linked to the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

A process screen defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile.

The following processing options can display on the Management Queue Process Screen:

Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Event Process Screen as shown below.



The Management Queue Event Process Screen allows data that is not required in the patient’s chart to be documented from the Process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. Processes can be edited (Example: Allow the infection control staff to input an email address to send a message regarding the MRSA results to the nursing staff).

(X) Chart Review – Allows chart review to be accessed for the patient.

(H) View History – Allows the management queue audit trail to be accessed.

(E) Edit Visit – Allows the visit screen to be edited. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as yes , and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

(V) View Visit – Allows the visit screen to be viewed. No editing is available. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as no, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

For a complete description of chart review, refer to Chapter 1, Chart Review in the Patient Data Review Function Reference.



The System can perform the following processes for an event:

Create an audit trail event

Delete a patient from the queue as a result of the process

Copy a management queue to another event management queue

Send an electronic mail message to a mailbox(s)

Update the patient’s visit information

Record and store the data input from the process screens

(M) Mass Process – Allows the user to use the same process against multiple entries within the same processing session. This option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Mass Processing? field defined as yes.


Selection Screen Line Definition LevelThe following fields display on the Table Builder Definition Screen for the Selection Screen Line level:

Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as management queue.

Input Defining this subfield as management queue can cause the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Management Group/QueueAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Partial Name Search?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays the patients included in a specified management group/queue. The System displays patients in the queue according to the following:

The criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field. Management queue(s) are linked to criteria in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.

The management group (that is, object type:queue [that is, sort type]) defined in the Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type. Management groups/queues are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”).

Impact ofChange


Management Group/Queue

Purpose Defines the management group/queue that determines the patients who display.


Links from the Management Queue Table, ^ rt("qv"), Management Queue Group level

Single selection

Links from the Management Queue Table, ^ rt("qv"), Management Queues subfile

System Use Displays the management group:queue pair defined in this subfield when this lookup type is selected. The System either displays the patients/events in the queue or a list of selection options that can be used to access the patients. The patients and the information identifying the patients varies depending on the definition of the management group:queue pair defined in this subfield.

NOTE: A management queue definition is not required. When a management queue is not defined in this subfield, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for the group for selection. Management queues are defined for a group in the Management Queue Table, ^ rt("qv"), Management Queues subfile.

Impact ofChange




Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient/event can be selected from the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected for processing.

No – Indicates patients can not be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?

Purpose Defines whether management queue processing can be performed from the Management Queue Process and Management Queue Event Process Screens.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows management queue processing to be performed. Causes the following processing options to display on the Management Queue Process Screen:

(H) View History – Allows the management queue activities defined for a patient to be viewed.

(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type for the object type.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed.

No – Indicates management queue processing cannot be performed.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient. This subfield displays only when the object:sort type is defined as event:patient alpha.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows patients to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter partial patient name prompt instead of displaying the Management Queue Screen. When a partial name is entered, the System displays the list of events for the specified patient.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. When this subfield is defined as no, the System displays the Management Queue Screen with a list of patients in the queue.

Impact ofChange




Phys Assignment Prompt?

Purpose Defines whether the System prompts the physician signed on to the System for assignment when a patient is selected from the list on the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays an Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt once a patient not assigned to the physician accessing this management queue is selected using this lookup type. The prompt displays only when the following occurs:



No – Indicates the System does not prompt for the physician to take responsibility for the patient.

Impact ofChange



Chapter 16

Mgmt Q: Insurance Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Insurance object type displays a list of patients with visits that have an insurance(s) defined. Insurances are defined for a visit in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Insurance/Payor data element. Patient visits can display in an insurance object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient’s insurance(s) meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and linked to a management queue in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.



This object type allows a user (Example: utilization review or managed care staff) to access insurance information for the patient’s visit. For example, a management queue can be constructed for patients who have a pending inpatient visit scheduled and an insurance that requires pre-authorization. When a visit is created that meets these criteria, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue. The user can then access the management queue and pre-authorize the patient’s visit before the patient is admitted.



Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has only a management group defined, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for that group and prompts for one to be identified.

When the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has a management group and queue defined, or when a management queue option is selected, the System displays the list of patients for the defined management group/queue.

The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:Insurance:discharge timeInsurance:discharge time order by dayInsurance:home locationInsurance:insuranceInsurance:patient alphaInsurance:preadmit timeInsurance:preadmit time order by dayInsurance:review agencyInsurance:visit timeInsurance:visit time order by day

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Insurance Object Type:

Area Table, ^afaInsurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip")Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)

Department Usage Managed CareManaged Care uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify and process patients who have visits with insurances that need authorization.

Utilization ReviewUtilization Review uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify patients who have visits with insurances that need authorization, and to review and authorize continuing care.



Insurance:Discharge TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:discharge time, the System displays the Ins:Discharge Time Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays entries in the queue in discharge time order. Patients in the management queue who are not discharged display at the end of the list. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

Insurance:Discharge Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:discharge time order by day, the System displays the Ins:Discharge Time by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays entries in the queue in discharge order by day. Only patients with a discharge time of today display. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.



Insurance:Home LocationWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:home location, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Ins:Home Location List Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays by home location, an alphabetic list of patients. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display. The sort order of the locations is determined by how the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Home Location(s) field is defined. When no home locations are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Home Location(s) field, the sort order of the locations is determined by the display order position defined in the Area Table,^afa, Area level, Display Order field for the location. When a patient is checked into a bed, the nursing unit is used as the home location. When no home location is defined, entries display at the end of the queue list under a No Location header.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no home location is defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield, the System displays an alphabetic list of Home Location Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for a home location(s) or all locations to be selected. Once a home location(s) is selected, the System displays the list of patients in alphabetic order sorted by home location. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one home location is defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield, the System displays by the defined home location, an alphabetic list of patients. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple home locations are defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Home Location Options. Only home locations assigned to patients in the queue display for selection. A home location(s) can be selected or all locations can be chosen. Once a home location(s) is selected, the System displays the Ins:Home Location:Selected Management Queue Screen as shown below.



This screen displays the list of patients in alphabetic order sorted by home location. The sort order of the home locations depends on the order in which the home locations are defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

Insurance:InsuranceWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:insurance, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Ins:Insurance Management Queue Screen as shown below.



This screen displays an alphabetic list of patients, sorted by primary insurance. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Insurance Options assigned to the patients in the queue.

An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays the list of patients in alphabetic order, sorted by primary insurance. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, by insurance, an alphabetic list of patients. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Insurance Options for selection. Only insurances assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be



chosen. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays the patients in alphabetic order, sorted by primary insurance. The sort order of the insurances depends on the order in which the insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.

Insurance:Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:patient alpha, the System displays the Ins:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays the patients in alphabetic order. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or patients who have been added manually to the queue display. When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified instead of displaying the Ins:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. Once a patient has been identified, the System displays the Ins:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen for the defined patient.



Insurance:Preadmit TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:preadmit time, the System displays the Ins:Preadmit Time Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays the patients in the queue sorted in chronological preadmission time order. Patients in the queue who do not have a preadmit time display at the end of the list. The preadmission time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Preadmission Time data element. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue display.



Insurance:Preadmit Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:preadmit time by day, the System displays the Ins:Preadmit Time by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays the patients in the queue who have preadmit times entered on the current date, in preadmit time order (that is, the patient with the most recent preadmit time displays at the bottom of the list). The preadmission time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Preadmission Time data element. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added to the queue display.



Insurance:Review AgencyWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as insurance:review agency, the System displays a list of Review Agency Options assigned to the patients in the queue. A No Review Agency message displays for patients who do not have a review agency assigned to them. Review Agency Options are defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^ rt("ira"), linked to an insurance in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”), Facility Definitions subfile, Review Agency field, and assigned to a patient in the field created from the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Review Agency data element. Once a review agency is selected, the System displays the Ins:Review Agency Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays patients in alphabetic order, sorted by review agency. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added to the queue display.



Insurance:Visit TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as insurance visit time, the System displays the Ins:Visit Time Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays the patients in chronological order for each day according to the visit activation time. When the visit is not activated, the System uses the scheduled visit time. Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^ nt(“ce”), or those who have been added to the queue display.

Insurance:Visit Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as insurance:visit time order by day, the System displays the Ins:Visit Time by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below.



This screen displays the patients in the queue who have visits starting on the current date, in visit time order (that is, the patient with the most recent visit time displays at the bottom of the list). Only those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added to the queue display.

Management Queue ScreensThe following information can display on the Insurance Object Type Management Queue Screen:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. The System truncates the patient name if necessary.

Alias Name – Displays the alias name(s) for the patient (in parentheses), following the patient’s name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen. The System allows alias names to be entered in two languages. Patient alias names and dual language alias names are defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Aliases data element.



Dual language name – Displays the patient’s name in a secondary language in parentheses after the patient’s name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen. The System allows the patient’s name to display in two languages. Dual languages for a patient name can be defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Name data element.

When the user places a mouse pointer over the patient’s name, alias names and secondary language names display in this order: patient name (last name, first name), secondary language name in parentheses, if defined, patient first alias name in parentheses, if defined. These names display in the ToolTip box. This is only available with QuadraMed® CPR Character User Interface (UI) Version 2.0 or greater.

Location – Displays the patient’s home location or last home location after discharge (that is, DIS-5102-A).

Home location header – Displays the home location in a header extending the length of the screen (Example: PD-6 North - Psychiatric). This header displays only for the home location sort type.

Discharge date header – Displays the current date. The discharge date displays only for the discharge time by day sort type.

Discharge time – Displays the time the patient was discharged. The discharge time displays only for the discharge time sort type.

Time – Displays the time the patient was discharged for the discharge time by day sort type. Displays the time the patient was preadmitted for the preadmit time by day sort type.

Insurance – Displays the name of the patient’s primary insurance. The insurance name displays as a column header only for the insurance, home location, patient alpha, and review agency sort types.

Insurance name header – Displays the primary insurance/payor in a header extending the length of the screen (Example: Blue Cross). The insurance name displays as a header only for the insurance sort type.

Status – Displays the patient's status (that is, active, pending visit, transfer, or discharge). The status displays only for the insurance sort type.

Number – Displays the patient’s medical record number. The patient’s medical record number displays only for the insurance, home location, and patient alpha sort types.

Visit number – Displays the patient’s visit number.

Preadmit time – Displays the date and time of preadmission. The preadmit date and time displays only for the preadmit time sort type.

The System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Primary Name With Alias? and Always Display First Alias? fields must be defined in order for the patient’s secondary language name and first alias name to display.



Preadmission date header – Displays the current date, unless an alternate date is specified. The preadmission date displays only for the preadmit time order by day sort type.

Review agency header – Displays the name of the selected review agency. The review agency displays only for the review agency sort type.

Contact person – Displays the name of contact person for the review agency. The contact person displays only for the review agency sort type.

Telephone – Displays the telephone number of the review agency. The telephone displays only for the review agency sort type.

Hours – Displays the hours of operations for the review agency. The hours display only for the review agency sort type.

Visit time – Displays the visit activation date and time. The visit activation time displays only for the visit time sort type.

Visit date header – Displays the current date. The visit date header displays only for the visit time by day sort type.


Age – Displays the age of the patient.

Physician – Displays the patient’s primary physician.

Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on the management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for insurance object:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. The user can also access a menu list or another menu function. The select patient option displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield is defined as yes. Once a patient is selected, the System can prompt Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when all of the following occur:


The user selecting the patient is a physician and does not have a current assignment to the patient.


The System defaults to no at the Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt. When the user answers yes, the System displays the medical service options for the physician and prompts for selection. In addition, the System prompts whether to save any previously active orders.



Once the transaction is filed, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list.


(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added manually to the management queue. When a patient is selected for addition to the management queue, the System evaluates the selection against the object type:sort type pair defined in this table. When the selection meets the criteria, the patient is added. When the selection does not meet the criteria, an error message displays. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes. The patient identification method used when a patient is added to the queue is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Subfile, Queue Add Default Inquiry(s) field.

GoTo – Allows the user to enter an alternate date and time to display patients in the management queue. This processing option is used for the following sort types:

Discharge time

Discharge time by day

Preadmit time

Preadmit time by day

Visit time

Visit time by day

(H) View History – Allows the management queue activities defined for a patient to be viewed. When this processing option is chosen, the System displays the Management Queue History Screen as shown below. The System displays events/processes for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Group level, History Display Groups field. This screen displays an audit trail of all activity for a patient in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review.

This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes. The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:

Date/Time – Displays the date/time each archive event was created or edited.

Event/Process – Displays the archive event. The following archive events can display:




Process Short Name – When a process defined for the management queue is performed, the System displays the process short name defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Process Short Name field. This occurs when the visit screens defined in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), have been edited or the process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile have been documented. Process screens are defined for the management queue group.

Created – Displays when the patient was initially placed in the queue. A patient can be added manually to the queue or entered automatically as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”).

Initial Review – Displays when the information in the queue has been reviewed. This archive event is based on the review process for the management group defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile.


Edited by – Displays the short name of the employee responsible for the archive event. Employee short names are defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field. The word System displays when the System is responsible for the archive event.



When an archive event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the detail data for the archive event. The System displays the archive event, management group/queue, event time, and the event action (that is, created, review) and how the event action took place (that is, manually by the System or as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”).

When a management queue group is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, the System displays the (A) View All Queue Groups processing option on the Management Queue History Screen. This processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, instead of viewing only the one defined in that field.

When reviewing an archive event in detail and multiple archive events have been created for the patient, the (P) Previous Event and (N) Next Event processing options can be chosen from the Management Queue History Detail Screen to view the other events. In addition, the user can click (V) View Process Screens to view the management queue process screen data associated with the process session.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient/event is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below.



This screen allows the user to access a visit or process screen defined for the management queue. The following information can display on the Management Queue Process Screen:




Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Insurance Process Screen as shown below.

The Management Queue Insurance Process Screen allows a process screen defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile to be accessed. A process screen can be defined to allow a user to perform a pre-authorization of a patient visit, or authorize insurance coverage for days remaining in the patient’s hospitalization. The System can perform the following processes for an event:


Delete a patient from the queue as a result of the process. Patients are deleted from the management queue as a result of processing or when a visit is closed.

The System automatically clears patients from the management queue when a visit is closed unless the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Retain Closed Visits? field is defined as yes.



Copy a management queue to another insurance management queue



Record and store the data entered from the process screens.



(E) Edit Visit – Allows the visit screen to be edited. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as yes, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.


(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type for the object type. Clicking (S) Sort causes the System to display the hard-coded Sort Type Options defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field. Once an option is selected, the System redisplays the patients in the queue in the selected format. Only sort type options applicable to the object type of insurance can be selected. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes, and when multiple sort types are available for the object type.

(T) Display Pending Transfers and Admissions – Allows patients to be sorted by pending transfers and pending admissions. This processing option displays only when the following criteria are met:

The Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field is defined as home location for the defined management queue.

The Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Selection Screen Line Definition level, Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected.

The Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Selection Screen Line Definition level, Data field, Home Locations subfield is defined with a home location.




(M) Mass Process – Allows the user to process multiple entries in the queue. This option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Mass Processing? field is defined as yes.

Expand – When the user clicks Expand from a Management Queue Screen, the System displays the Management Queue Expand Screen as shown below.


Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Status, Physician, or Visit Number column on the Management Queue Screen.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type



Management Group/QueueList/SelectedAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Partial Name Search?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required





The management group (that is, object type):queue (that is, sort type) defined in the Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type. Management groups/queues are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”).

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the management group/queue for which the patients display.


Links from the Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv"), Management Queue Group level

Single selection

Links from the Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv"), Management Queues subfile

System Use Displays the management group:queue pair defined in this subfield when this lookup type is used. The System either displays the patients in the queue or a list of selection options that can be used to access the patients. The patients and the information identifying the patients varies depending on the definition of the management group:queue pair defined in this subfield.

NOTE: A management queue definition is not required. When a management queue is not defined in this subfield, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for the group for selection. Management queues are defined for a group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv"), Management Queues subfile.

Defining this subfield as insurance:patient alpha causes the Partial Name Search? field to display for definition.

Defining this subfield with the following sort types causes the List/Selected subfield to display for definition:

Insurance

Home location

Impact ofChange


List/Selected

Purpose Defines additional sort types for the management queue. This subfield displays only for the following insurance object:sort types:

Insurance:insurance

Insurance:home location

Input (L) List

(S) Selected

Primary Lookup Type



Defaults to list

System Use (L) List – Displays all the entries in the management queue based on the object:sort type pair defined in the Management Group/Queue subfield.

(S) Selected – Displays the selection options defined for the sort type when this lookup type is used. For example, for the object:sort type pair of insurance:insurance, when this subfield is defined as selected, and the Insurances subfield of this table is not defined, the System displays a list of Insurance Options assigned to the patients in the queue. Once an insurance is selected, the System displays a list of patients for that insurance. Defining this subfield as selected can cause the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Home LocationsInsurances

Impact ofChange


Home Locations

Purpose Defines the home locations by which the patients can be sorted, and the order in which the home locations display on the Management Queue Screen when the sort type is defined as home location. Defining one or more home locations in this subfield allows the user to process patients with insurances in specific home locations. This subfield displays only when the List/Selected field is defined as selected for the insurance:home location object:sort type pair.


Location look-up name

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, ^afa, Area level, Area Name field.

Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, ^afa

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of home location(s) assigned to the patients in the queue for selection on the Management Queue Screen when no home location is defined in this subfield.

Displays the alphabetic patient list for the home location defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one home location is defined in this subfield.

Displays an alphabetic list of the home locations, assigned to the patients in the queue and defined in this subfield, for selection on the Management Queue Screen, when multiple home locations are defined in this subfield.

NOTE: Displays the home locations on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield, when no home location is selected from the alphabetic list. For example, if Medical Unit 5 is added in this subfield as number 1, and Psychiatric Unit 3 is added as number 2, Medical Unit 5 displays at the top of the list, followed by Psychiatric Unit 3 on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


List/Selected



Insurance

Purpose Defines the insurance by which the patients are sorted and the order in which the insurances display when the sort type is defined as insurance. Defining one or more insurances in this subfield allows the user to process patients with a specific insurance(s). This subfield displays only when the List/Selected subfield is defined as selected for the insurance:insurance object:sort type pair.


Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^ rt("ip")

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of insurances assigned to the patients in the queue for selection, on the Management Queue Screen, when no insurance is defined in this subfield.

Displays the alphabetic patient list for the insurance defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one insurance is defined in this subfield.

Displays an alphabetic list of the insurances, assigned to the patients in the queue and defined in this subfield, on the Management Queue Screen, when multiple insurances are defined in this subfield.

NOTE: Displays the insurances on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield, when no insurance has been selected from the alphabetic list. For example, if Medicare insurance is added in this subfield as number 1, and Blue Cross insurance is added as number 2, Medicare displays at the top of the list, followed by Blue Cross on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected from the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient(s) to be selected for processing. The user can access a menu list or another menu function.

No – Indicates patients cannot be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?

Purpose Defines whether management queue processing can be performed in the management queue.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes



System Use Yes – Allows processing to be performed on an entry in the management queue. Causes the following processing options to display on the Management Queue Screen:





Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient. This subfield displays only when the object sort type is defined as insurance:patient alpha.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter partial patient name prompt instead of displaying the Ins:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. When a partial name is entered, the System displays the Management Queue Screen information for the specified patient.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. When this subfield is defined as no, the System displays the Ins:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no





Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?


Chapter 17

Mgmt Q: Order Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Order Object Type displays a list of patients who have orders requiring authorization. The order object type allows the user to obtain authorization for orders (that is, referrals, diagnostic procedures, and home health visits, and so on) for patients prior to a procedure being performed. In addition, a user can construct an order management queue to monitor the completion status of order authorization for specific patients, within a certain visit location, for a specific order generator, or for a certain insurance or benefit plan. The order object type management queue ensures order authorizations are processed in a timely manner. Patients/orders can display in an order object type management queue as a result of one the following:

The patient has an order(s) requiring authorization


Order Authorization ProcessInsurances for a patient can be defined during registration processing in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Insurance/Payor data element and can default into the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Insurance/Payor data element. Patients display in the queue when they have an insurance defined for the visit and an order is placed that requires authorization.

The System determines whether authorization is required for a procedure based on the ordered procedure and/or the patient’s visit type. In order for the authorization orders to display in the order management queue, the user must define the Procedure Table, ^t, Order Information Screen, Authorization Status field with the appropriate management group/queue/sort type.

Management queues with an order object type cannot be linked to the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”).



During order entry, the System defaults the authorization status defined in the Procedure Table, ^t, Order Information Screen, Authorization Status field into the field created from the Order Entry Profile Table, ^nt(“op”), Authorization Status data element. If the authorization defaults to required, the user can edit the authorization status to not required during order entry. When the authorization status defaults to not required, the field is unavailable for selection.

On-line and Manual AuthorizationsOrders can be authorized during order entry and routed to an order management queue through an on-line or manual process. The process type is defined for an order management queue in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Process Type field. The process types for authorizations can be defined as follows:

On-line – An on-line process type indicates the authorization is obtained through an on-line interface. The interface electronically provides information regarding the authorization status of a procedure. During order entry, if the authorization status is required for the procedure, and the management queue is defined as on-line, the System attempts to obtain authorization from the on-line system defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Authorization Interface field.

During this time, the System displays an authorization analysis message. If the authorization is received within five seconds, the System displays an authorization obtained message and prompts whether to print a notification. If the authorization is not received within five seconds, the System displays a pending authorization message. Regardless of the status received from the on-line interface, the System routes all orders to the defined management queue for review. Once an approval is received for an order in the management queue, the System changes the authorization status to approved. The authorization code, insurance, and number of events that have been approved can be viewed by clicking (H) View History from the Management Queue and Management Queue Process Screens.

When no interface is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Authorization Interface field, the System displays a System Unavailable message during order entry.

Manual – A manual process type indicates the System routes the order to the defined management queue for manual processing. The authorization status can be updated using either the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Authorization Status or Events data element during management queue processing.



Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has only a management group defined, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for that group and prompts for one to be identified. When the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has a management group and queue defined, the System displays the list of patients for the defined management group/queue. The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:

Authorization statusOrder generatorOrder timePatient alphaPrimary insurance, benefit plan order timePrimary insurance, order timePrimary visit location, order time

Order: Authorization StatusWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:authorization status, the System displays the Order: Authorization Status Management Queue Screen as shown below.

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Order Object Type:

Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”)Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv")

Department Usage Managed CareManaged care uses this lookup type, object type to construct management queues used to define and monitor the authorization status of orders for patients.

Primary Care/Provider OfficeA primary care provider’s office staff uses this lookup type, object type in order to determine whether a procedure ordered for a patient has been approved by the patient’s insurance company.

Home HealthHome Health departments use this lookup type, object type in order to determine and record whether a patient’s insurance company will authorize the needed home health visits.



This screen displays the orders in reverse chronological order, sorted by authorization status (that is, pending, approved, or rejected).



Order:Order GeneratorWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:order generator, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Order: Order Generator Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays by order block time, sorted by order generator, a list of patients with orders requiring authorization.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, the System displays a list of Order Generator Options defined for the orders in the queue and prompts for one or all to be selected. Once an order generator(s) is selected, the System displays a list of the patients/orders in order block time, sorted by order generator.



Order:Order TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:order time, the System displays the Order:Order Time Screen as shown below. This screen displays by order block time, a list of patients with orders requiring authorization.



Order:Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:patient alpha, the System displays the Order:Patient Alpha Screen as shown below. This screen displays an alphabetic list of the patients with orders requiring authorization.

When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified instead of displaying the Order:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. Once a patient is identified, the System displays the Order: Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen for the defined patient.



Order: Primary Insurance, Benefit Plan Order TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:primary insurance, benefit plan order time, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list and the System displays the Order:Primary Insurance, Benefit Plan Order Time Screen as shown below. This screen displays in order block time, sorted by primary insurance/benefit plan, a list of patients with orders requiring authorization.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no insurance/benefit plan is defined in the Insurance/Benefit Plan subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of Insurance/Benefit Plan Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for a benefit plan(s) or all to be selected. Once an insurance/benefit plan(s) is selected, the System displays in order block time, sorted by the defined insurance benefit plan(s), a list of patients/orders.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one insurance/benefit plan is defined in the Data field, Insurance/Benefit Plan field of this lookup type, the System displays, in order block time, sorted by the defined insurance/benefit plan, a list of patients/orders in the queue.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple insurances/benefit plans are defined in the Data field, Insurance/Benefit Plans subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Insurance/Benefit Plan Options. Only insurance/benefit plans assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. An insurance/benefit plan(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. When an insurance/benefit plan(s) is selected, the System displays, in order block time, sorted by primary insurance/benefit plan, a list of patients/orders. The sort order of the insurance/benefit plans depends on the order in which the insurances/benefit plans are defined in the Data field, Insurance/Benefit Plans subfield.

Order: Primary Insurance, Order TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:primary insurance, order time, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Order:Primary Insurance, Order Time Screen as shown below.

This screen displays in order block time, sorted by primary insurance, a list of patients with orders requiring authorization.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Insurance Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for an insurance(s) or all to be selected. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays, in order block time, sorted by the defined insurance(s), a list of patients/orders. When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, in order block time, sorted by the defined insurance, a list of patients/orders. When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Insurance Options. Only insurances assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. When an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays, in order block time, sorted by primary insurance, a list of patients/orders. The sort order of the insurances depends on the order in which the insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield.

Order: Primary Visit Location, Order TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as order:primary visit location, order time, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Order:Primary Visit Location, Order Time Screen as shown below. The primary visit location sort type allows a care provider to monitor the completion status of orders within a specific location. This screen displays in order block time, sorted by primary visit location, a list of patients with all orders requiring authorization.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, the System displays a list of Visit Locations assigned to patients in the queue, and prompts for one or all to be selected. Once a visit location is selected, the System displays in order block time, sorted by primary visit location, a list of patients/orders.

Management Queue ScreensThe following information displays on the Management Queue Screen:

Date/time – Displays the date and time the procedure was ordered (that is, order block time).



Dual Language Name – Displays the patient’s name in a secondary language in parentheses after the patient’s name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen. The System allows the patient’s name to display in two languages. Dual languages for a patient name can be defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Name data element.

When the user places a mouse pointer over the patient’s name, alias names and secondary language names display in this order: patient name (last name, first name), secondary language name in parentheses, if defined, patient first alias name in parentheses, if defined. These names display in the ToolTip box. This is only available with UltiView Version 2.0 or greater.

Procedure – Displays the ordered procedure that requires authorization.

Status – Displays the status of the order (Example: Active, Pending, DischDC, Expired).

Authorization status – Displays the status of the authorization for the order (that is, approved, pending, rejected). The authorization status displays as a header for the authorization status sort type and the Management Queue Expand Screen. The authorization status column displays for all sort types.




Order generator – Displays the name of the order generator as a header. The order generator displays only for the order generator sort type.

Primary insurance – Displays the name of the patient’s primary insurance as a header. The primary insurance displays only for the primary insurance, order time sort type.

Primary insurance/benefit plan – Displays the name of the patient’s primary insurance and the name of the associated benefit plan as a header. The primary insurance/benefit plan displays only for the primary insurance/benefit plan, order time sort type.

Visit Location – Displays the visit location as a header. The visit location displays only for the primary visit location, order time sort type.

Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on the management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for the order object type:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected for processing to access another menu list or menu function. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield is defined as yes. Once a patient is selected, the System prompts Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when the Data field, Phys Assignment Prompt? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. This prompt displays only when the following occur:



The System defaults to no at the prompt. When the user answers yes, the System displays the medical service options for the physician and prompts for selection. In addition, the System prompts whether to save any previously active orders. Once the transaction is filed, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list.


(H) View History – Allows the management queue activities defined for a patient to be viewed. When this processing option is chosen, the System displays the Management Queue History Screen as shown below. The System displays events/processes for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Group level, History Display Groups field. This screen displays an audit trail of all




activity for a patient in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes. The authorization code, insurance, and number of events that have been approved can be viewed by clicking (H) View History from the Management Queue and Management Queue Process Screens.

The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:



Process Short Name – Indicates the process short name defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Process Short Name field displays under the Event/Process header on the Management Queue History Screen. This occurs when the visit screens defined in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), have been edited or the process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile have been documented.

Created – Indicates when the patient was initially placed in the queue. This occurs when an order requiring authorization is placed for a patient with insurance.

Initial Review – Indicates the information in the queue has been reviewed. This archive event is based on the review process for the management group defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile.




Edited by – Displays the short name of the employee responsible for the archive event. Employee short names are defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee level, Employee Short Name field. The word System displays when the System is responsible for the archive event.

When a patient is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the selected archive event for review. When an archive event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the detail data for the archive event. The System displays the archive event, management group/queue, event time, and the event action (that is, next review date/time and order authorization status). When a management queue group is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group Level, History Display Groups field, the System displays the (A) View All Queue Groups processing option on the Management Queue History Screen. This processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group Level, History Display Groups field, instead of viewing only the one defined in that field.

When multiple archive events have been created for the patient, the (P) Previous Event and (N) Next Event processing options can be chosen from the Management Queue History Detail Screen to view the other events. In addition, the user can click (V) View Process Screens to view the management queue process screen data associated with the process session.

(M) Mass Process – Allows the user to process multiple entries in the queue. This option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Mass Processing? field defined as yes.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient/order is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below. This screen allows the user to access a visit or process screen defined for the management queue.







Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Order Process Screen as shown below.

The Management Queue Order Process Screen allows a process screen defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile to be accessed. The System can perform the following processes for an event:


Delete a patient from the queue as a result of the process. Patients are deleted from the management queue as a result of processing, or when a visit is closed. The System automatically clears patients from the management queue when a visit is closed unless the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Retain Closed Visits? field is defined as yes.

Copy a management queue to another order management queue.

Send an electronic mail message to a mailbox(s).

Update the patient’s visit information.

Record and store the data input from the process screens.

A process screen can be defined with the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”) Authorization Status or Events data elements to perform the following:



Authorization Status data element – Allows a user to update the current status of an authorization for an order. This data element is used when the user is authorizing an entire order. Users who perform manual authorizations (that is, calls to the insurance company or review agency) can update the status during processing from this screen.

Events data element – Allows the user to define the specific events of the order that have been approved. This data element is used when the user is authorizing only specific events of an order.


(E) Edit Visit – Allows the visit screen to be edited from the Management Queue Process Screen. For example, a user can update insurance/guarantor information. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as yes, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.





(V) View Visit – Allows the visit screen to be viewed from the Management Queue Process Screen. No editing is available. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as no, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type for the object type. Clicking (S) Sort causes the System to display the hard-coded Sort Type Options defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field. Once an option is selected, the System redisplays the patients in the queue in the selected format. Only sort type options applicable to the object type of order can be selected. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes, and when multiple sort types are available for the object type.

(V) View Order – Allows the order information and audit trail to be reviewed.




The Management Queue Expand Screen displays the same information as the Management Queue Screen with the following exceptions:

Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Auth column on the Management Queue Screen.

GoTo – Allows the user to do the following from the Management Queue and Management Queue Expand Screens:

Enter an alternate date and time to display patients in the management queue

Redisplay the list of Sort Type Options for selection.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Primary Lookup Type



Management Group/QueueList/SelectedAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Partial Name Search?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays patients in the queue according to the management group (that is, object type) and queue (that is, sort type) defined in the Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type. Management groups/queues are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”).

Impact ofChange






Single selection


Required



Defining this subfield as order:patient alpha cause the Partial Name Search? field to display for definition.


Authorization status

Order generator

Order time



Primary insurance, order Time

Primary insurance, benefit plan order time

Impact ofChange


List/Selected

Purpose Defines additional sort types for the management queue. This subfield displays for the following order object: sort types:

Order:authorization status

Order:order generator

Order:order time

Order:primary insurance, order time

Order:primary insurance, benefit plan order time

Order:primary visit location, order time

Input (L) List

(S) Selected

Defaults to list


(S) Selected – Displays the selection options defined for the sort type when this lookup type is used. For example, for the object:sort type pair of order:order generator, when this subfield is defined as selected, the System displays a list of Order Generator Options assigned to the orders in the queue.

Once an order generator is selected, the System displays a list of orders for that order generator. Defining this subfield as selected can cause the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Insurance/Benefit PlansInsurances

Impact ofChange


Insurance/Benefit Plans

Purpose Defines the insurance/benefit plans by which the patients are sorted. This subfield displays only when the object:sort type pair is defined as order:primary insurance, benefit plan order time. A benefit plan must be defined for the insurance.


Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”), Insurance/Payor level

Management Group/Queue (Continued)



Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”), Insurance/Payor level, Benefit Plan Definition subfile

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of insurance/benefits plans assigned to the patients in the queue on the Management Queue Screen, when no insurance/benefit plan is defined in this subfield.

Displays by order block time, the patient list for the insurance/benefit plan defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one insurance/benefit plan is defined in this subfield.

Displays an alphabetic list of the insurance/benefits plans defined in this subfield and assigned to the patients in this queue on the Management Queue Screen, when multiple insurance/benefits plans are defined in this subfield.

NOTE: Displays the insurance/benefits plans on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield, when no insurance/benefit plan is selected from the alphabetic list. For example, if Blue Cross/Basic Contract Information is added in this subfield as number 1, and Medicare/Plan B is as number 2, Blue Cross/Basic Contract Information displays at the top of the list, followed by Medicare/Plan B on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Insurances

Purpose Defines the insurance by which the patients are sorted and the order in which the insurances display when the sort type is defined as insurance. This subfield displays only when the List/Selected subfield is defined as selected for the order:primary insurance, order time object:sort type pair.


Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip")

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of insurances assigned to the patients in the queue when no insurance is defined in this subfield.

Displays by order block time, the patient list for the insurance defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one insurance is defined in this subfield.

Displays an alphabetic list of the insurances defined in this subfield and assigned to the patients in the queue on the Management Queue Screen, when multiple insurances are defined in this subfield.

NOTE: Displays the insurances on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield, when no insurance has been selected from the alphabetic list. For example, if Medicare insurance is added in this subfield as number 1, and Blue Cross insurance is added as number 2, Medicare displays at the top of the list, followed by Blue Cross on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Insurance/Benefit Plans



Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected from the Management Queue Screen to access a menu list or another menu function.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected for processing.

No – Indicates patients can not be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?


Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows processing to be performed on an entry(s) in a management queue. Causes the following processing options to display on the Management Queue Screen:




No – Indicates management queue processing can not be performed.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient. This subfield displays only when the object:sort type is defined as order:patient alpha.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter partial patient name prompt instead of displaying the Order:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. When a partial name is entered, the System displays the Order:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen information for the specified patient.

No – Indicates patients can not be identified by a partial name search. When this subfield is defined as no, the System displays the Order:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange





Purpose Defines whether the System prompts for assignment when a patient not assigned to the physician accessing this management queue is selected from the list on the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays an Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt once a patient not assigned to the physician accessing this management queue is identified using this lookup type. The prompt displays only when the following occurs:




Impact ofChange



Chapter 18

Mgmt Q: Patient Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Patient Object Type displays a list of patients according to pre-defined criteria. Patients can display in a patient object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), for the management queue. In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and linked to a management queue in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.



This object type can be used to set up a management queue with criteria defined to identify patients for various purposes (Example: registration processing, utilization review, and so on).

The patient object type consists of the Patient Alpha sort type.



Table Attributes


When the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has a management group and queue defined, or when a management queue option is selected, the System displays the list of patients for the defined management group/queue. The Patient:Patient Alpha object:sort type pair can be accessed in this lookup type.

Patient:Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined with an object type of patient and a sort type of patient alpha, the System displays the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen as shown below.

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Patient Object Type:

Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)

Department Usage Managed CareManaged Care uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify and process patients (Example: registration or utilization review processing).

Utilization ReviewUtilization Review uses this lookup type, in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify patients who have visits with insurances that need authorization, and to review and authorize continuing care.



The Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen displays the patients in the queue in alphabetical order. The System displays only those patients who met the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or patients who have been manually added to the queue. When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified instead of displaying the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. Once a patient has been identified, the System displays the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen for the defined patient.

Management Queue ScreensThe following information displays on the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen:






When the user places a mouse pointer over the patient’s name, alias names and secondary language names display in this order: patient name (last name, first name), secondary language name in parentheses, if defined, patient first alias name in parentheses, if defined. These names display in the ToolTip box. This is only available with UltiView Version 2.0 or greater.

Number – Displays the patient’s medical record number.

Visit Cnt – Displays the number of visits the patient has made to the facility.

Sex – Displays the patient’s sex.

Birthdate – Displays the patient’s birthdate in the format: day, month, year.

Age – Displays the patient’s age.

Stat – Displays the current status of the patient. The following statuses can display: IP, EP, SP, Exp.

Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on the management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for patient object:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. The select patient option displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield is defined as yes. Once a patient is selected, the System can prompt Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when all of the following occur:


The user selecting the patient is a physician and does not have a current assignment to the patient.





The System defaults to no at the Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt. When the user answers yes, the System displays the medical service options for the physician and prompts for selection. In addition, the System prompts whether to save any previously active orders.

Once the transaction is filed, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list. When the user accessing the patient is a resident (that is, has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Residents employee type category option), the System places the resident’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Resident(s) field and adds the patient to the resident’s list.

(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added manually to the management queue. When a patient is selected for addition to the management queue, the System evaluates the selection against the object type:sort type pair defined in this table. When the selection meets the criteria, the patient is added. When the selection does not meet the criteria, an error message displays. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes for the management queue being accessed. The patient identification used when a patient is added to the queue is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Queue Add Default Inquiry(s) field.

(H) View History – Allows the management queue activities defined for a patient to be viewed. When this processing option is chosen, the System displays the Management Queue History Screen as shown below. The System displays events/processes for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Group level, History Display Groups field. This screen displays an audit trail of all activity for a patient in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes.




The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:



Process Short Name – When a process defined for the management queue is performed, the System displays the process short name defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Process Short Name field. This occurs when the visit screens defined in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), have been edited or the process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile have been documented.







When an archive event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the detail data for the archive event. The System displays the archive event, management group/queue, event time, and the event action (that is, created, review) and how the event action took place (that is, manually by the System or as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”)).

When a management queue group is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, the System displays the (A) View All Queue Groups processing option on the Management Queue History Screen.

This processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, instead of viewing only the one defined in that field.

When reviewing an archive event in detail, and multiple archive events have been created for the patient, the (P) Previous Event and (N) Next Event processing options can be chosen from the Management Queue History Detail Screen to view the other events. In addition, the user can click (V) View Process Screens to view the management queue process screen data associated with the process session.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile.

When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below. This screen allows the user to access a process screen defined for the management queue.



The Management Queue Process Screen displays the process screen options defined for the patient object type in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. The following processing options can display on the Management Queue Process Screen:

Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Patient Process Screen as shown below.

This screen allows data that is not required in the patient’s chart to be documented from the process screens defined in the Management Queue Table, ̂ rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. The System can perform the following processes for an event:


Delete a patient from the queue as a result of the process

Copy a management queue to another patient management queue


Record and store the data input from the process screens







Expand – When the user clicks Expand from the Management Queue Screen, the System displays the Management Queue Expand Screen as shown below.


Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Birthdate column on the Management Queue Screen.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange







Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type



Management Group/QueueAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Partial Name Search?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required


Patients display in the queue according to the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field. Criteria are linked to management queue(s) in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.

Patients display in the queue according to the management group (that is, object type):queue (that is, sort type) defined in the Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type. Management groups/queues are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”).

Impact ofChange








Single selection


Required



Defining this field with a queue causes the Partial Name Search? subfield to display.

Impact ofChange


Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected from the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. The user can then access an additional menu list or menu function.

No – Indicates no patient can be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?


Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows processing to be performed on an entry(s) in the management queue. Causes the following processing options to display on the Management Queue Screen:




Impact ofChange






Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient. This subfield displays only when the object:sort type is defined as patient:patient alpha.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter partial patient name prompt instead of displaying the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. When a partial name is entered, the System displays the Management Queue Screen for the specified patient.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. When this subfield is defined as no, the System displays the Patient:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays an Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt once a patient not assigned to the physician accessing this management queue is selected using this lookup type. This prompt displays only when the following occurs:




Impact ofChange



Chapter 19

Mgmt Q: Visit Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Visit object type displays a list of patient visits. Patient visits can display in a visit object type management queue as a result of one or more of the following:

The patient visit meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and management queues are linked to the criteria definition in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.

The patient visit has been copied to the queue destination in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Copy Destination(s) field. Entries in a management queue can be copied to another management queue as a result of management queue processing.

The patient visit has been manually added to the management queue. Patients can be added to a management queue when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes.

The patient has a visit type defined to always perform abstracting in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Medical Records Definition Screen, Abstract States field.

This definition is required, in addition to the visit meeting the criteria defined in Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), when using the visit object type to create a management queue that contains visits that need to be abstracted.



The visit object type/sort types can be used to define management queues in the following ways:

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue to edit or process a patient’s visit information. For example, the Managed Care department in a facility can review and process a patient’s insurance verification information for a visit. When a visit is created that meets the criteria, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue.

The user can then access the management queue, and perform management queue processing (that is, a process defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile) to verify insurance coverage. Once coverage is verified, the patient can be deleted from the queue as a result of that process.

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue that lists patients in the emergency room according to their triage acuity levels. A patient can be triaged or classified during visit or triage processing, according to the severity (that is, acuity) of the complaint (that is, crisis, emergent, urgent, non-urgent). Treatment of patients with severe symptoms can be expedited and patients can be re-classified within the management queue as their symptoms change. Patients display in visit activation order making it easier for the emergency room staff to determine the wait time of the patient. A triage acuity management queue can be created with the visit:triage acuity object type:sort type pair.

The visit object type can allow a user to create a management queue that contains visits that have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted. Abstracting is the practice of medical record departments that are required to extract data from the medical record for the purposes of compiling statistics and indexes, as well as reporting aggregate data to state and federal agencies. A master abstracting queue can be created to allow the user to process patients or copy them to an individual queue for processing. An abstracting management queue can be created when the visit object type management queue is defined with the following sort types:Abstracting statusMedical record numberVisit numberVisit statusVisit type

When these sort types are utilized, the System displays an Abstract header on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).



Table Attributes


When the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has a management group and queue defined, or when a management queue option is selected, the System displays the list of patients for the defined management group/queue.

The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:Visit:abstracting statusVisit:discharge timeVisit:discharge time order by dayVisit:home location

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afaInsurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”)Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)

Department Usage Admitting/RegistrationAdmitting/Registration uses this lookup type: object type in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to create work lists of patients to edit/process visits from visit creation through visit discharge.

EmergencyThe emergency department uses this lookup type:object type to create a management queue that displays a list of patients classified according to their triage acuity levels (that is, crisis, emergent, non-urgent etc.). Treatment of patients with severe symptoms can be expedited and patients can be re-classified within the management queue as their symptoms change. Patients display in visit activation order making it easier for the emergency room staff to determine the wait time of the patient.

Managed CareThe managed care department uses this lookup type:object type in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify patients who have visits with insurances that need authorization, and to review and authorize continuing care.

Medical RecordsMedical records department uses this lookup type:object type to create a management queue that contains visits that have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted.



Visit:medical record numberVisit:patient alphaVisit:preadmit timeVisit:preadmit time order by dayVisit:primary insuranceVisit:primary insurance, review agencyVisit:triage acuityVisit:visit numberVisit:visit statusVisit:visit timeVisit:visit time order by dayVisit:visit type

Abstracting StatusWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:abstracting status, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit Abstracting Status Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays a list of patients, sorted by abstracting status (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, etc.). The patients can display in discharge date or visit time order.

When this sort type is used, the System displays an Abstract header and column on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, the System displays a list of Abstracting Status Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for an abstracting status or all to be selected. Once an abstracting status is selected, the System displays, by the defined abstracting status(es), a list of patients.



Visit:Discharge TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as visit:discharge time, the System displays the Visit:Discharge Time Screen as shown below. This screen displays entries in the queue in discharge time order. Patients in the management queue who are not discharged display at the end of the list.



Visit:Discharge Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:discharge time order by day, the System displays the Visit:Discharge Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays patients who have been discharged on the current day. In addition, the user can click Goto to enter an alternate date to display patients in the management queue.



Visit:Home LocationWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:home location, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit:Home Location Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays by home location, a list of patients.

Visit:Home Location Management Queue ScreenThe sort order of the locations is determined by how the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Home Location(s) field is defined. When no home locations are defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Home Location(s) field, the sort order of the locations is determined by the display order position defined in the Area Table, ^afa, Area level, Display Order field for the location. When a patient is checked into a bed, the nursing unit is used as the home location. When no home location is defined, entries display at the end of the queue list under a No Location header.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one home location is defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield, the System displays a list of patients for that home location.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple home locations are defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Home Location Options. Only home locations assigned to patients in the queue display for selection. A home location(s) can be selected or all locations can be chosen. Once a home location(s) is selected, the System displays the Visit:Home Location: Selected Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays the list of patients for the home location(s). The sort order of the home locations depends on the order in which the home locations are defined in the Data field, Home Locations subfield.



Visit:Medical Record NumberWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:medical record number, the System displays the Visit:Medical Record Number Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays entries in the queue in medical record number order. The Visit:Medical Record Screen displays entries in the queue for discharged or activated visits that need to be abstracted.

When this sort type is used, the System displays an Abstract column on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).



Visit:Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:patient alpha, the System displays the Visit:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays an alphabetic list of patients. When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified instead of displaying the Visit:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. Once a patient has been selected, the System can allow the user access to a menu list or another menu function when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.



Visit:Preadmit TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:preadmit time, the System displays the Visit:Preadmit Time Screen as shown below. This screen displays patients in chronological preadmission time order. Patients in the queue who do not have a preadmit time display at the end of the list. The preadmission time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Preadmission Time data element.



Visit:Preadmit Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:preadmit time order by day, the System displays the Visit:Preadmit Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays the patients who have preadmit times entered on the current date, in preadmit time order (that is, the patient with the most recent preadmit time displays at the bottom of the list). The preadmission time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Preadmission Time data element. The user can click Goto to enter an alternate date to display patients in the management queue.



Visit:Primary InsuranceWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:primary insurance, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list and the System displays the Visit:Primary Insurance Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays an alphabetic list of patients, sorted by primary insurance. Patients with no insurance defined for the visit display under the No Insurance header.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Insurance Options assigned to the patients in the queue. An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays the list of patients in alphabetic order, sorted by primary insurance.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, by insurance, an alphabetic list of patients. Only patients who have the defined insurance display for selection.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Insurance Options for selection. Only insurances assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays the patients in alphabetic order, sorted by primary insurance. The sort order of the insurances depends on the order in which the insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield.

Visit:Primary Insurance, Review AgencyWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:primary insurance, review agency, the System displays a list of Review Agency Options assigned to the patients in the queue. A No Review Agency message displays for patients who do not have a review agency assigned to them. Once a review agency is selected, the System displays the Visit:Review Agency Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays patients in alphabetic order, sorted by review agency. Review Agency Options are defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^ rt(“ira”), linked to an insurance in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”), Facility Definitions subfile, Review Agency field, and assigned to a patient in the field created from the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Review Agency data element.



Visit:Triage AcuityWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:triage acuity, the System displays the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays patients classified according to their triage acuity levels. Triage acuity levels are defined in the Triage Acuity Table, ^rt(“ta”). They consist of classifications such as crisis, emergent, urgent, or non-urgent. The order in which the triage levels display is based on how the Triage Acuity Table, ^rt(“ta”), Display Order field is defined.

Patients with no triage acuity defined display under the No Triage Acuity header. Triage levels can be defined or updated during visit processing in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Triage Acuity data element, or during triage processing in the field created from the Result Entry Profile Table, ^nt(“rp”), Triage data element. When the triage acuity is changed during visit processing, the System automatically moves the patient under the corresponding triage acuity heading.



The visit object type: triage acuity sort type can be defined with a subsort type defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Subsort Type field. Those subsort types are as follows:

User defined – Allows the user to configure the triage acuity management queue in the following manner:

Move – Moves a queue entry within the management queue to another triage level within the same triage acuity management queue. When a patient is moved, the original triage acuity definition in the visit record is not changed.

Insert – Inserts a patient into the triage acuity management queue at any triage acuity level.

Visit timeAllows patients to be sorted by visit time within the triage acuity management queue.

Patient alphaAllows patients to be sorted by alphabetical order within the triage acuity management queue. Displays patients in visit activation time order.

Each name for a triage acuity level (that is, Crisis, Emergent, Urgent, Non-urgent) defined in the Triage Acuity Table, ^rt(“ta”), Triage Acuity Name field displays as a header on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen when the subsort type is defined as user defined.

The name for a triage acuity level defined in the Triage Acuity Table, ̂ rt(“ta”), Triage Acuity Name field displays on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen only when a patient is registered using that triage acuity option, when the subsort type is defined as visit time.

The name for a triage acuity level defined in the Triage Acuity Table, ̂ rt(“ta”), Triage Acuity Name field displays on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen only when a patient is registered using that triage acuity option, when the subsort type is defined as patient alpha.



Visit:Visit NumberWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:visit number, the System displays the Visit:Visit Number Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays entries in the queue in visit number order. This sort type can display visits that have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted. When this sort type is used, the System displays an Abstract column on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).



Visit:Visit StatusWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:visit status, the System defaults to list and displays the Visit:Visit Status Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays, by visit status, an alphabetic list of patients. The Visit:Visit Status Screen can display entries in the queue that have visits that are pending, or have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted. When this sort type is used, the System displays an Abstract column on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and the object type:sort type pair in the Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as visit:visit status, the System displays a list of Visit Status Options assigned to patients in the queue. A visit status(es) can be selected or all can be chosen. Once a visit status(es) is selected, the System displays, by visit status, an alphabetic list of patients.



Visit:Visit TimeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:visit time, the System displays the Visit:Visit Time Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays patients in chronological order for each day according to the visit activation time.

When the visit is not activated, the System uses the scheduled visit time. In addition, the user can click Goto to enter an alternate date to display patients in the management queue. The visit time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Time data element during visit processing.



Visit:Visit Time Order by DayWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:visit time order by day, the System displays the Visit:Visit Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays patients in chronological order for the current day according to the visit activation time. In addition, the user can click Goto to enter an alternate date to display patients in the management queue. The visit time for a patient is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Time data element during visit processing.

Visit:Visit TypeWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit:visit type, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit:Visit Type Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays an alphabetic list of patients, sorted by visit type (that is, Inpatient, Emergency, and so on). This screen can display entries in the queue that have visits that have been discharged or activated, and need to be abstracted. When this sort type is used, the System displays an Abstract column on the management queue screen that displays the status of the abstract for the visit (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, partial/held).



When the Data field, List/Selected is defined as selected, the System displays a list of the visit types assigned to the patients in the queue for selection. The visit types display in the order defined in Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Type Options level. The System prompts for a visit type(s) or (A) All to be selected. Once a visit type(s) is selected, the System displays an alphabetic list of patients, sorted by visit type.

Management Queue ScreensThe following information can display on the Visit Object Type Management Queue Screen:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. The System truncates the patient name if necessary.





Location – Displays the patient’s home location or last home location after discharge (that is, DIS-5102-A). The patient’s location displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Discharge Time Discharge Time Order by DayHome LocationHome Location:SelectedPatient AlphaPreadmit TimePreadmit Time Order by DayPrimary InsuranceTriage AcuityVisit TimeVisit Time Order By Day

Home location header – Displays the home location in a header extending the length of the screen (Example: PD-6 North - Psychiatric). This header displays on the Visit:Home Location Management Queue Screen.

Discharge date – Displays the day, month, and year of the patient’s discharge. The discharge date displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Abstracting StatusMedical Record NumberVisit NumberVisit StatusVisit Type

Discharge date header – Displays the current date. The discharge date header displays on the Visit:Discharge Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen.

Discharge time – Displays the time the patient was discharged. The discharge time displays on the Visit:Discharge Time Management Queue Screen.

The System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Display Primary Name With Alias? and Always Display First Alias? fields must be defined as yes in order for the patient’s secondary language name and first alias name to display. When the user places a mouse pointer over the patient’s name, alias names and secondary language names display in this order: patient name (last name, first name), secondary language name in parentheses, (if defined), patient first alias name in parentheses, (if defined). These names display in the ToolTip box. This is available only with QuadraMed® CPRCharacter User Interface (UI) Version 2.0 or greater.



Time – Displays the time on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:

Displays the time the patient was discharged on the Discharge Time Order by Day Screen.

Displays the time the patient was preadmitted on the Preadmit Time by Day Screen.

Displays the visit activation time on the Triage Acuity Screen.

Insurance – Displays the name of the patient’s primary insurance. The insurance name displays on the Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Insurance name header – Displays the primary insurance/payor in a header extending the length of the screen (Example: Blue Cross). The insurance name displays as a header on the Visit:Primary Insurance Management Queue Screen.

Status – Displays the patient's visit status (that is, active, pending visit, transfer, or discharge). The Status column can display the patient’s visit type along with status (that is, DIS EP) or/home location of the patient. The Status column displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Abstracting StatusHome Location – Displays whether the patient has a pending transfer out of the home location.Medical Record NumberPatient Alpha – Displays the date of the pending visitVisit NumberVisit Type

Abstract status – Displays the status of the patient’s abstract (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, complete, complete/corrected). The following Abstracting Status Options can display:

Pending – Displays while the visit is active and before the visit is discharged.

Incomplete – Displays when the visit is discharged, before any edits are made.

Partial – Displays when manual edits are made to the abstract and the abstract is accepted as partial.

Complete – Displays when the user accepts the abstract as complete.

Complete/Corrected – Displays when the user has completed an abstract, opened an abstract for editing, or corrected and accepted the abstract again as corrected.

The abstract status displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Abstracting StatusMedical Record NumberVisit NumberVisit StatusVisit Type



Abstract status header – Displays the status of the patient’s abstract (that is, pending, incomplete, partial, complete, complete/corrected) as a header extending the length of the screen. The abstract status header displays on the Visit:Abstracting Status Management Queue Screen.

Number – Displays the patient’s medical record number. The patient’s medical record number displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Abstracting StatusHome LocationMedical Record NumberPrimary InsurancePrimary Insurance, Review AgencyPatient AlphaVisit Type

Visit number (Visit #) – Displays the patient’s visit number. The patient’s visit number displays on the following Visit Management Queue Screens:Discharge Time Order By DayDischarge TimePrimary InsurancePrimary Insurance, Review AgencyTriage AcuityVisit Number (Displays Under The Number Column)Visit TimeVisit Time By Day

Preadmission date header – Displays the current date, unless an alternate date is specified. The preadmission date header displays on the Visit:Preadmit Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen.

Preadmit Time – Displays the time the patient was preadmitted. The preadmit time displays on the Visit:Preadmit Time Management Queue Screen.

Review agency header – Displays the name of the selected review agency. The review agency header displays on the Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Contact person – Displays the name of contact person for the review agency. The contact person for the review agency is defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt(“ira”), Contact field. The contact person displays on the Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.



Telephone – Displays the telephone number of the review agency. The telephone number for the review agency is defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt(“ira”), Telephone field. The telephone number displays on the Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Hours – Displays the hours of operations for the review agency. The hours of operation for the review agency are defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt(“ira”), Hours Of Operation field. The hours of operation display on the Visit:Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Visit time – Displays the visit activation date and time. The visit time displays on the Visit:Visit Time Management Queue Screen.

Visit date header – Displays the current date. The visit date header displays only on the Visit:Visit Time Order by Day Management Queue Screen.

Visit type header – Displays the visit type (that is, Inpatient, Emergency) as a header extending the length of the screen. The visit type header displays on the Visit:Visit Type Management Queue Screen.

Triage acuity header – Displays the triage acuity (Example: Crisis, Emergent, etc.) as a header extending the length of the screen. Patients who do not have a triage level defined display at the end of the list under No Triage Acuity. The triage acuity displays on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen.


Age – Displays the age of the patient.

Physician – Displays the patient’s primary physician.

Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on the management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for the visit object type:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected to access a menu list or another menu function. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield is defined as yes.

Once a patient is selected, the System can prompt Are you taking responsibility for this patient? This prompt displays only when all of the following occur:








(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added manually to the management queue. When a patient is selected for addition to the management queue, the System evaluates the selection against the object type:sort type pair defined in this table. When the selection meets the criteria, the patient is added. When the selection does not meet the criteria, an error message displays.

This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table,^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes for the management queue being accessed. The patient identification method used when a patient is added to the queue is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Queue Add Default Inquiry(s) field. In addition, this processing option does not display on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen, when the sort type is defined as triage acuity, and the subsort type in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Subsort Type field is defined as user defined.


The System displays events/processes for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ̂ rt(“qv”), Management Queues Group level, History Display Groups field. This screen displays an audit trail of all activity for a patient in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes. The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:




When the sort type is defined as triage acuity, and the subsort type in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Subsort Type field is defined as patient alpha or visit time, and a patient is added to the triage acuity management queue, the System displays the patient under a No Triage Acuity header.





Deleted – Displays when the patient is removed from the queue by auto-completion. Auto-completion is defined for a management queue/sort type in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Auto Delete Expression field.






When a patient is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the selected archive event for review. When an archive event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the detail data for the archive event. The System displays the archive event, management group/queue, event time, the event action (that is, created, review), and how the event action took place (that is, manually by the System or as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”)). When a management queue group is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, the System displays the (A) View All Queue Groups processing option on the Management Queue History Screen. This processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups/queues in which the patient displays instead of viewing only the group(s) defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field.


(M) Mass Process – Allows the user to process multiple entries in the queue. The System performs the same process for each entry selected. Process Options are defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. This option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Allow Mass Processing? field is defined as yes.

(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient/event is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below. This screen allows the user to access a visit or process screen defined for the management queue.







Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Visit Process Screen as shown below.

This screen allows a process screen defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile to be accessed. A process screen can be defined to allow a user (Example: the Managed Care Department) to perform a case review of a patient visit, including verification of a patient’s insurance, etc. The System can perform the following processes for an event:



Copy a management queue to another visit location management queue






(X) Chart Review – Allows chart review to be accessed for the patient. For a complete description of chart review, refer to Chapter 1, Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ^rt("id") in the Patient Data Review Function Reference.


(E) Edit Visit – Allows the visit screen to be edited. This processing option displays when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as yes, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

(V) View Visit – Allows the visit screen to be viewed. No editing is available. This processing option displays when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as no, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.

(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type for the object type. Clicking (S) Sort causes the System to display the hard-coded Sort Type Options defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field. Once an option is selected, the System redisplays the patients in the queue in the selected format. Only sort type options applicable to the object type of visit can be selected. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes, and when multiple sort types are available for the object type.



(I) Insert – Allows the user to insert a queue entry into the management queue at any triage level on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen. Clicking (I) Insert causes the System to prompt the user to select the position (that is, triage acuity level) before which to insert the queue entry or to click (E) End. Once a position is defined, the System prompts the user to identify a patient. Once a patient is identified, the System prompts the user to accept the queue addition. When a patient is inserted into the queue, the original triage acuity definition in the visit record is not changed. This processing option displays only for the visit object type:triage acuity sort type when the triage acuity sort type is defined with the subsort type of user defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Subsort Type field. For this sort/subsort type, the (A) Add processing option is not available from the Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen.

(M) Move – Allows the user to move a queue entry within the management queue to another triage level within the same management queue on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen. When a patient is moved, the original triage acuity definition in the visit record is not changed.

(S) Change Sort Type – Allows the user to select another sort type defined for the object type on the Visit:Triage Acuity Management Queue Screen. This processing option displays only when multiple sort types are defined for the object type. When this processing option is selected, the System displays the Sort Type Options defined for the object type for selection.

(T) Display Pending Transfers and Admissions – Allows patients to be sorted by pending transfers and pending admissions. This processing option displays only when the following criteria are met:



The Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ̂ rt(“id”), Selection Screen Line Definition level, Data field, Home Locations subfield is defined with a home location.



Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Abstract, Physician, Status, or Contact Person column on the Management Queue Screen.

Goto – Allows the user to enter an alternate date and time to display patients in the management queue. This processing option is used for the following sort types:Discharge time



Discharge time order by dayPreadmit timePreadmit time order by dayVisit timeVisit time order by day





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type


Input Defining this subfield as management queue causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Management Group/QueueAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required




The criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field. Management queues are linked to criteria in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type


Input Defining this subfield as management queue causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Management Group/QueueAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required


The criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field. Management queues are linked to criteria in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.


Impact ofChange





Links from the Management Queue Table, ^ rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level

Single selection (Optional)

Links from the Management Queue Table, ^ rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile

Required





NOTE: A management queue definition is not required. When a management queue is not defined in this subfield (that is, only a management group is defined), the System displays a list of management queue options defined for the group for selection. Management queues are defined for a group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile.

When this subfield is defined with an option created using the visit:patient alpha object type:sort type pair, the System displays the Partial Name Search? subfield for definition.

When this subfield is defined with an option using the following object type:sort type pairs, the System displays the List/Selected subfield for definition:

Visit:abstracting status

Visit:home location

Visit:primary insurance

Visit:visit status

Visit:visit type

Impact ofChange


List/Selected

Purpose Defines additional sort types for the management queue. This subfield displays when the Management Group/Queue subfield is defined with an option created using the following visit object:sort types:

Visit:abstracting status

Visit:home location

Visit:primary insurance

Visit:visit status

Visit:visit type

Input (L) List

(S) Selected

Defaults to list


(S) Selected – Displays the selection options defined for the sort type when this lookup type is used. For example, for the object:sort type pair of visit:primary insurance, when this subfield is defined as selected, and the Insurances subfield is not defined, the System displays a list of Insurance Options for selection assigned to the patients in the queue.

Once an insurance option is selected, the System displays an alphabetic list of patients for that insurance. Defining this subfield as selected can cause the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Home LocationsInsurances




Impact ofChange


Home Locations

Purpose Defines the home location(s) by which the patients can be sorted, and the order in which the home locations display for selection on the Management Queue Screen when the sort type is defined as home location. Defining one or more home locations in this subfield allows the user to process patients with visits in specific home locations. This subfield displays only when the List/Selected field is defined as selected for the visit:home location object:sort type pair.

Input Add/delete editor


NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, ^afa, Area Name field.Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, ^afaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, afa, Area level, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of home locations assigned to the patients in the queue for selection on the Management Queue Screen when no home location or when multiple home locations are defined in this subfield.

Displays the alphabetic patient list for the home location defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one home location is defined in this subfield.

NOTE: When multiple home locations are defined, the System displays the home locations on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield. For example, if Medical Unit 5 is added in this subfield as number 1, and Psychiatric Unit 3 is added as number 2, Medical Unit 5 displays at the top of the list, followed by Psychiatric Unit 3 on the Management Queue Screen.

Displays the (T) Display Pending Transfers and Admissions processing option on the Management Queue Screen when this subfield is defined with a home location in addition to the following criteria:



Impact ofChange


Insurances

Purpose Defines the insurance(s) by which the patients are sorted and the order in which the insurances display when the sort type is defined as primary insurance. Defining one or more insurances in this subfield allows the user to process patient visits with a specific insurance(s). This subfield displays only when the List/Selected subfield is defined as selected for the visit:primary insurance object:sort type pair.

List/Selected




Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”)

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of insurances assigned to the patients in the queue for selection, on the Management Queue Screen, when no insurance is defined in this subfield, or when multiple insurances are defined in this subfield.


NOTE: When multiple insurances are defined, the System displays the insurances on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield. For example, if Medicare insurance is added in this subfield as number 1, and Blue Cross insurance is added as number 2, Medicare displays at the top of the list, followed by Blue Cross on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected from the Management Queue Screen for access to a menu list or another menu function.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. The user can access an additional menu list or menu function.

No – Indicates patients cannot be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?


Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes






Insurances (Continued)



Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether a partial name search can be performed to identify a patient. This subfield displays only when the object:sort type is defined as visit:patient alpha.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter partial patient name prompt instead of displaying the Visit:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen. When a partial name is entered, the System displays the Management Queue Screen information for the specified patient.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. When this subfield is defined as no, the System initially displays the Visit:Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no





Impact ofChange


Allow Processing? (Continued)


Chapter 20

Mgmt Q: Visit Location Object Type

OverviewThe Patient Identification Expand Screen Table, ̂ rt(“id”), Management Queue lookup type, Visit Location object type displays a list of patients with non-closed visits who have a visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element. Patients can display in a visit location object type management queue as a result of one of the following:

The patient meets the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”). In order for a patient to display in the management queue, the criteria must be linked to a management queue. Criteria are defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Criteria field, and management queues are linked to the criteria definition in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), Management Queue(s) field.



This object type allows a user to define a management queue to edit or process a patient’s visit information according to visit location. For example, the Utilization Review department can review and process a patient’s insurance authorization information for a visit. A management queue can be defined for case processing for a specific visit location. When a visit is created that meets the criteria for visit location, the System adds that visit to the appropriate management queue. The user can then access the management queue and process and/or close the patient’s utilization review case.



Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type has only a management group defined, the System displays a list of management queue options defined for that group and prompts for one to be identified. The following object:sort type pairs can be accessed in this lookup type:

Primary insurancePrimary insurance, review agencyVisit location patient alphaVisit location time order

Table Relationship Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Management Queue Lookup Type, Visit Location Object Type:

Area Table, ^afaInsurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip")Management Queue Table, ^rt("qv")

Department Usage Admitting/RegistrationAdmitting/Registration uses this lookup type: object type in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to create work lists of patients to edit/process visits from visit creation through visit discharge.

NursingNursing uses this lookup type: object type in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to route specific visits to selected management queues according to visit location. For example, nursing can define a management queue for a diabetic teaching nurse. When a patient is admitted to a specific visit location with the diagnosis of Diabetes Mellitus, the visit is automatically routed to the diabetic teaching nurse’s management queue.

QA/Utilization ReviewQA/Utilization Review uses this lookup type: object type in conjunction with the Criteria Evaluation Engine (CEE) and management queues, to identify patients who have visits with insurances that need authorization, and to review and authorize continuing care.



Visit Location:Primary InsuranceWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined with an object type of visit location, and a sort type of primary insurance, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit Location Primary Insurance Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays, by insurance, an alphabetic list of patients. Insurances for a patient can be defined during registration processing in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Insurance/Payor data element and can default into the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Insurance/Payor data element. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been manually added to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Insurance Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for an insurance(s) or all to be selected. Once an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays, by the defined insurance, an alphabetic list of patients.

The sort order of the insurances depends on the order in which the insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been manually added to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one insurance is defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, by the defined insurance, an alphabetic list of patients. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Insurance Options. Only insurances assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. An insurance(s) can be selected or all insurances can be chosen. When an insurance(s) is selected, the System displays, by primary insurance, an alphabetic list of patients. The sort order of the insurances depends on the order in which the insurances are defined in the Data field, Insurances subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.



Visit Location:Primary Insurance, Review AgencyWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield is defined as visit location:primary insurance, review agency, the System displays a list of Review Agency Options assigned to patients in the queue and prompts for an option to be selected. A No Review Agency option displays for patients who do not have a review agency. Review Agency Options are defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt("ira"), and linked to an insurance in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Facility Definitions subfile, Review Agency field. The review agency can default into the field created from the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Review Agency data element. Once a review agency is selected, the System displays the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen as shown below. This screen displays, by review agency, an alphabetic list of patients. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt("ce"), or those who have been added manually to the queue.



Visit Location:Visit Location Patient AlphaWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit location: visit location patient alpha, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit Location Patient Alpha Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays by visit location, an alphabetic list of patients. Visit locations are defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no visit location is defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Visit Location Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for a visit location(s) or all to be selected. Once a visit location(s) is selected, the System displays, by the defined visit location, an alphabetic list of patients.



The sort order of the visit locations depends on the order in which the visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one visit location is defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, by the defined visit location, an alphabetic list of patients. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Visit Location Options.

Only visit locations assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. A visit location(s) can be selected or all visit locations can be chosen. When a visit location(s) is selected, the System displays, by visit location, an alphabetic list of patients.

The sort order of the visit locations depends on the order in which the visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.



Visit Location: Visit Location Time OrderWhen the object type:sort type pair in the Data field, Management Group/Queue subfield of this lookup type is defined as visit location: visit location time order, the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type automatically defaults to list, and the System displays the Visit Location Time Order Management Queue Screen as shown below.

This screen displays by visit location, in visit time order (that is, the patient with the most recent visit time displays at the bottom of the list). Visit locations are defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and no visit location is defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays a list of Visit Location Options assigned to the patients in the queue and prompts for a visit location(s) or all to be selected. Once a visit location(s) is selected, the System displays, by the defined visit location, in visit time order, a list of patients. The sort order of the visit locations depends on the order in which the visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.



When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and one visit location is defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays, by the defined visit location, in visit time order, a list of patients. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

When the Data field, List/Selected subfield of this lookup type is defined as selected, and multiple visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield of this lookup type, the System displays an alphabetic list of the defined Visit Location Options. Only visit locations assigned to the patients in the queue display for selection. A visit location(s) can be selected or all visit locations can be chosen. When a visit location(s) is selected, the System displays, by visit location(s), an alphabetic list of patients. The sort order of the visit locations depends on the order in which the visit locations are defined in the Data field, Visit Locations subfield. The System displays those patients who meet the criteria defined in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”), or those who have been added manually to the queue.

Management Queue ScreensThe following information displays on the Management Queue Screens:

Visit location header – Displays the visit location as a header extending the length of the screen (Example: PD-Radiology). The visit location displays as a header on the Visit Location Patient Alpha and Visit Location Time Order Management Queue Screens.

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient’s names are truncated when necessary.


Dual Language Name – Displays the patient’s name in a secondary language in parentheses after the patient’s name. If the name is too long to display, an ellipsis (…) displays on the screen. The System allows the patient’s name to display in two languages. Dual languages for a patient name can be defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Name data element.




When the user places a mouse pointer over the patient’s name, alias names and secondary language names display in this order: patient name (last name, first name), secondary language name in parentheses, if defined, patient first alias name in parentheses, if defined. These names display in the ToolTip box. This is only available with QuadraMed® CPR Character User Interface (UI) Version 2.0 or greater.

Visit Time – Displays the visit activation date and time. The visit time column displays on the Visit Location Patient Alpha and Visit Location Time Order Management Queue Screens.

Vis (Visit) Location (column) – Displays the patient’s visit location. Visit location is defined for a patient in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element. The visit location column displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance and Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screens.

Number (Med Rec # ) – Displays the patient’s medical record number under the column Number or Med Rec #. The patient’s medical record number column displays for the following Visit Location Management Queue screens:Primary InsurancePrimary Insurance, Review AgencyPatient AlphaTime OrderManagement Queue Expand Screen

Visit Number – Displays the patient’s visit number. The visit number displays column displays on the following Visit Location Primary Insurance Management Queue Screen.



Insurance – Displays the patient’s primary insurance. The patient’s insurance displays as a header on the Visit Location Primary Insurance Management Queue Screen.

Insurance (column) – Displays the patient’s primary insurance. The patient insurance column displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient’s admitting physician. The physician’s short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field. The physician’s short name displays on the following Visit Location Management Queue screens:Primary InsurancePatient AlphaTime Order



Contact Person – Displays the name of the insurance contact person, when defined for the visit. The contact person displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Review Agency (header) – Displays the name of the selected review agency. The review agency displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Contact – Displays the name of the contact at the review agency in the Review Agency header. The contact displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Telephone – Displays the area code and telephone number of the review agency in the Review Agency header. The telephone number displays on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Hours – Displays the hours of operation for the review agency in the Review Agency header. The hours display on the Visit Location Primary Insurance, Review Agency Management Queue Screen.

Management Queue ProcessingThe following processing options can display on the management queue screen and the management queue expand screen for the visit location object type:sort type combinations:

Select patient – Allows a patient to be selected for processing or to access a menu list or another menu function. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield is defined as yes. Once a patient is selected, the System can prompt Are you taking responsibility for this patient? This prompt displays only when the all of the following occur:








(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added manually to the management queue. When a patient is selected for addition to the management queue, the System evaluates the selection against the object type:sort type pair defined in this table. When the selection meets the criteria, the patient is added. When the selection does not meet the criteria, an error message displays.

This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table,^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Subfile, Allow Manual Add? field is defined as yes for the management queue being accessed. The patient identification method used when a patient is added to the queue is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues Subfile, Queue Add Default Inquiry(s) field.


The System displays events/processes for the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ̂ rt(“qv”), Management Queues Group level, History Display Groups field. This screen displays an audit trail of all activity for a patient in the queue. The audit trail contains archive events that can be selected for review. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes. The following information displays on the Management Queue History Screen:











When a patient is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, The System displays the selected archive event for review. When an archive event is selected from the Management Queue History Screen, the System displays the detail data for the archive event. The System displays the archive event, management group/queue, event time, and the event action (that is, created, review) and how the event action took place (that is, manually by the System or as a result of criteria evaluating as true in the Criteria Engine Table, ^nt(“ce”)). When a management queue group is defined in the Management Queue Table, ̂ rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, the System displays the (A) View



All Queue Groups processing option on the Management Queue History Screen. This processing option allows the user to view all the management queue groups defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level, History Display Groups field, instead of viewing only the one defined in that field.



(P) Process – Allows the processes defined for the management queue to be performed. The (P) Process option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. Clicking (P) Process causes the System to prompt for a patient(s) to be selected. Once a patient/event is selected, the System displays the Process Options defined for the group in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile. When a process option is selected, the System displays the Management Queue Process Screen as shown below.



This screen allows the user to access a visit or process screen defined for the management queue. The following information can display on the Management Queue Process Screen:




Edit – Selecting a management queue process screen to edit displays the Management Queue Visit Location Process Screen as shown below.

This screen allows a process screen defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile to be accessed. A process screen can be defined to allow a user (Example: the Utilization Review Department) to perform a case review of a patient visit, including updating the status of a patient’s insurance authorization, notifying a referral physician, etc.

The System can perform the following processes for an event:





Copy a management queue to another visit location management queue






(E) Edit Visit – Allows the visit screen to be edited. This processing option displays only when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Allow Visit Edit? field is defined as yes, and a visit screen sequence is defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Visit Screen Sequence field.


(S) Sort – Allows the user to select another sort type for the object type. Clicking (S) Sort causes the System to display the hard-coded Sort Type Options defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queues subfile, Sort Type field. Once an option is selected, the System redisplays the patients in the queue in the selected format. Only sort type options applicable to the object type of visit location can be selected. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes, and when multiple sort types are available for the object type.



Next Review – Displays the date calculated from the information defined in the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Processes subfile, Next Review Date/Time field. Depending on the object type:sort type pair definition, this column replaces the Physician, or Contact Person column on the Management Queue Screen.






Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required







Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange


Line Type





Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type



Management Group/QueueList/SelectedAllow Selection?Allow Processing?Phys Assignment Prompt?

Required




Impact ofChange






Single selection


Required






Visit location patient alpha

Visit location primary insurance

Visit location time order

Impact ofChange


List/Selected

Purpose Defines additional sort types for the management queue. This subfield displays for the following visit location object:sort types:

Visit location:visit location patient alpha

Visit location:primary insurance

Visit location:visit location time order

Input (L) List

(S) Selected

Defaults to list


(S) Selected – Displays the selection options defined for the sort type when this lookup type is used. For example, for the object:sort type pair of visit location:patient alpha, when this subfield is defined as selected, and the Visit Locations subfield is not defined, the System displays a list of visit location options assigned to the patients in the queue.

Once a visit location is selected, the System displays an alphabetic list of patients for that visit location. Defining this subfield as selected can cause the following additional subfields to display for definition:

InsurancesVisit Locations

Impact ofChange





Insurances

Purpose Defines the insurance by which the patients are sorted and the order in which the insurances display when the sort type is defined as primary insurance. Defining one or more insurances in this subfield allows the user to process patients with a specific insurance(s). This subfield displays only when the List/Selected subfield is defined as selected for the visit location:primary insurance object:sort type pair.


Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip")

System Use Displays an alphabetic list of insurances assigned to the patients in the queue, on the Management Queue Screen, when no insurance is defined in this subfield, or when multiple insurances are defined in this subfield.


NOTE: When multiple insurances are defined, the System displays the insurances in the order defined in this subfield. For example, if Medicare insurance is added in this subfield as number 1, and Blue Cross insurance is added as number 2, Medicare displays at the top of the list, followed by Blue Cross on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Visit Locations

Purpose Defines the visit locations by which the patients can be sorted, and the order in which the visit locations display for selection on the Management Queue Screen when the sort type is defined as visit location patient alpha, or visit location time order. Defining one or more visit locations in this subfield allows the user to process patients in visit locations. This subfield displays only when the List/Selected field is defined as selected for the visit location:visit location patient alpha and visit location:visit location time order object:sort type pairs.



NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Area Name field.Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.



System Use Displays an alphabetic list of visit location(s) assigned to the patients in the queue, on the Management Queue Screen, when no visit location is defined in this subfield or when multiple visit locations are defined in this subfield.

Displays the alphabetic patient list for the visit location defined in this subfield on the Management Queue Screen, when one visit location is defined in this subfield.

NOTE: When multiple visit locations are defined, the System displays the visit locations on the Management Queue Screen in the order defined in this subfield. For example, if Medical Unit 5 is added in this subfield as number 1, and Psychiatric Unit 3 is added as number 2, Medical Unit 5 displays at the top of the list, followed by Psychiatric Unit 3 on the Management Queue Screen.

Impact ofChange


Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected from the Management Queue Screen for access to a menu list or another menu function.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected for processing. The user can access an additional menu list or menu function.

No – Indicates patient(s) can not be selected. The numbers corresponding to the patient names are unavailable for selection.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?


Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes






Impact ofChange


Visit Locations (Continued)




Purpose Defines whether the System prompts for assignment when a patient not assigned to the physician accessing this management queue is selected from the list on the Management Queue Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no





Impact ofChange



Chapter 21

Staff Assignment Lookup Type

OverviewThe staff assignment lookup type is used to display the patients assigned to a specific employee/provider. Employees are assigned to patients in the Staff Assignment Queue menu function.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Staff Assignment Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Staff Assignment Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Staff Assignment Lookup Type:

Employee/Provider Table, ^aeEmployee Type Table, ^aet(“et”)Work Queue Table, ^nt("wq")

Department Usage Ancillary DepartmentsAncillary departments use this lookup type, such as radiology, technologist, or transporter, to identify patients assigned to a specific employee.

Medical StaffPhysicians and Nurses use this lookup type to identify patients assigned to a specific employee.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Employee subfield of this table is defined. The Employee subfield can be defined as follows:

Employee – Displays the Staff Assignment Screen for the employee defined in the Data field, Employee subfield.

Current User – Displays the Staff Assignment Screen for the user currently signed on to the System.

Ask User – Prompts for an employee to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the employee using standard employee/provider methods. Once an employee is identified, the System displays the Staff Assignment Screen for that employee.

Once an employee is identified, the System can limit the patients who display, depending on how the Work Queue field is defined. When a work queue is defined, the System limits the display of patients to those who are assigned to the specified work queue. When a work queue is not defined, the System allows all patients to be accessed, regardless of work queue assignment.

The following information displays on the Staff Assignment Screen as shown below:

Queue Assignment – Displays the name of the queue to which the employee is assigned, the patient name, and room number. The queue name that displays depends on the type of queue defined. Work Queue Options are defined in the Work Queue Table, ^ nt("wq").

Queue Count – Displays the number of events in the queue.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as staff assignment, which displays the patients assigned to a specific employee/provider.

Input Defining this subfield as staff assignment, causes the following subfields to display for definition:

EmployeeEmployee TypesWork Queue

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified nursing or ancillary department.

Impact ofChange




Employee

Purpose Defines the employee/provider for whom the patient list displays when this lookup type is used.

Input Employee identification

Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âeExpand

(C) Current User

(U) User Asked


System Use Employee ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified employee/provider when this lookup type option is accessed.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the employee signed on to the System.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts for an employee to be identified when this lookup type option is accessed.

Expand – Allows the employee to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. For a complete description of these methods, refer to Chapter 1, Employee/Provider Identification in the Employee/Provider Function Reference

Impact ofChange


Employee Types

Purpose Defines the employee type(s) that determines the employees who can be accessed when this lookup type is selected. This field displays only when the Employee subfield is defined as ask user.


Partial name match

Multiple selection

Links from the Employee Type Table, âet("et")

System Use Limits the employees who can be identified to those who have the specified employee type(s) defined. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, âet("et"), and linked to an employee/provider in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

When an employee type(s) is not defined in this subfield, the System allows access to all employees, regardless of employee type.

Impact ofChange




Work Queue

Purpose Defines the work queue(s) that can be accessed in this lookup type.


Links from the Work Queue Table, ^nt("wq")

System Use Limits the display of patients to those who are assigned to the specified work queue.

When a work queue is not defined in this subfield, the System allows all patients to be accessed, regardless of work queue assignment.

Impact ofChange



Chapter 22

Resource Lookup Type

OverviewThe resource lookup type is used to search for patients by the resource assigned to the patient. Only patients who have been scheduled through resource scheduling display for selection. This lookup type is helpful for physicians and other healthcare providers who need access to the patients assigned to them for a specific day. Patients for a specific resource(s) display according to visit type/status. For example, this lookup type can be defined to only display the active (that is, status), clinic (that is, visit type) patients who have a resource scheduled appointment with Dr. XYZ. The System displays the patients of the defined visit type/status who have appointments with the defined resource for a specific day.

In addition, a resource can be a location. For example, a patient can be scheduled for a chest x-ray procedure that takes place in Radiology, Exam Room 1. Exam Room 1 is the resource. The System displays the patients of the defined visit type/status who have appointments in Exam Room 1 for a specific day.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Resource Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Resource Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Resource Lookup Type:

Resource Table, ^nt(“rc”)



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Resource(s) subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Resource(s) subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific resource(s) – Causes the System to display the list of Resource Options defined in the Resource(s) subfield of this table, and prompts for a resource to be selected. When a resource is selected, the System displays the Resource Lookup Type Screen as shown below. The Resource Lookup Type Screen displays the patients who have events scheduled through resource scheduling for the currently defined resource according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type.

Current User – Causes the System to display patients who have resource scheduled appointments for the current user accessing this lookup type. The System displays the Resource Lookup Type Screen. The System limits the display to those patients with visit type/status(es) defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type. For example, XYZ is currently signed on and has access to his active clinic patients scheduled for a specific day.

Terminal Location – Causes the System to display the patients who have resource scheduled appointments with the resource (that is, the location) defined for the terminal being used. The System displays the Resource Lookup Type Screen. A resource can be a location defined in the Area Table, ^afa, and linked to the Resource Table, ^nt(“rc”), Resource Location field. For example, a patient can be scheduled for a chest x-ray procedure that takes place in Radiology, Exam Room 1. Exam Room 1 is the resource. The terminal that is being used must be defined with the same location in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field as the resource defined in the Resource Table, ^nt(“rc”), Resource Location field. The System limits the display to those patients with visit type/status(es) defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type.

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments within a facility can use this lookup type to access patients who have an appointment with a specific resource.

ClinicA clinic uses this lookup type to access patients who have an appointment with a specific resource.

Home HealthA home health department or agency uses this lookup type to access patients who have an appointment with a specific resource (Example: home health aide, visiting nurse).

PhysiciansPhysicians use this lookup type to access patients who have scheduled appointments.



The Resource Lookup Type Screen displays the following information:

Time of appointment

Patient name

Events assigned to the resource through resource scheduling

Events display for the current day in chronological order. An alternate date/time can be accessed by clicking Goto. Clicking Goto causes the System to display the patients assigned to the resource for the specified day.





Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required




Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This field should be defined as resource which displays the patient(s) who have resource scheduled appointments with a specified resource.

Input Defining this subfield as resource causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Resource(s)Visit Type/Status List

Required

System Use Displays the patients, scheduled through resource scheduling, for the resource(s) defined in the Resource(s) subfield.

Impact ofChange


Resource(s)

Purpose Defines the resource(s) that determines the patients who can be accessed when this lookup type is used to identify patients.


Partial name match

Single selection

Links from the Resource Table, ^nt(“rc”)

Data (Continued)



(C) Current User


This subfield must be defined in order for patients to display.

System Use Displays the resource(s) defined in this subfield for selection during patient identification. Selecting a resource causes the System to display a list of patients that have appointments scheduled, through resource scheduling, with the defined resource for the current or alternate day. The System displays events scheduled in any place that resource scheduling can be accessed. Appointments can be scheduled with a resource through the following menu functions:

Resource Schedule BatchResource Schedule Event FirstResource Schedule Interim ResourceResource Schedule ManagerResource Schedule No ShowResource Schedule Patient FirstResource Schedule Time First

(C) Current User – Displays the patients who have resource scheduled appointments with the user currently signed on to the System.

(T) Terminal Location – Displays the patients who have appointments with the resource (that is, the location) defined for the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table ^ad, Location field.

NOTE: The terminal that is being used must be defined with the same location in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field as the resource defined in the Resource Table, ^nt(“rc”), Resource Location field.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when a patient is identified using the resource lookup type. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as all active clinic patients who have an appointment scheduled through resource scheduling with a specific resource.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Resource(s) (Continued)



Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

ActiveDischarge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required






Impact ofChange




Chapter 23

Visit Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe visit location lookup type is used to identify a patient by his/her visit location. A patient’s visit location is defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Location subfield of this table is defined. The Location subfield can be defined as follows:

Table Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit Location Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Visit Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Visit Location Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afa

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments can use this lookup type to identify patients in a specific location. Visit locations are in the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Locations data element.

PhysiciansPhysicians use this lookup type to access the location of his/her patients.



Single Location – Causes the System to automatically display the Visit Location Screen as shown below.

Multiple Locations – Causes the System to display a list of location options and prompt for one to be selected. Once a location is selected/entered, the System displays the Visit Location Screen as shown below.

Ask User – Causes the System to prompt the user to enter a location (Example: A nursing unit or a room/bed). The System defaults to the location of the terminal being used, if defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field. Clicking Expand causes the System to display a list of visit locations for selection. Once a location is selected/entered, the System displays the Visit Location Screen as shown below.

Terminal Location – Causes the System to display the patients assigned to the location of the terminal being used on the Visit Location Screen as shown below. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field.

The following information displays on the Visit Location Screen:

Time – Displays the time the visit was activated.








Physician – Displays the short name of the patient's current attending physician. The provider's short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as visit location, which displays the patient(s) who have an active visit and are assigned to a specified location.

Input Defining this subfield as visit locationcauses the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Location(s)Visit Type/Status ListPhysician Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays those patients who have the same visit type/status as defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield and who are assigned to the location defined in the Location(s) subfield.

Impact ofChange


Location(s)

Purpose Defines the location used to determine which patients display during a search.



NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area or Sub-sub-area, Area Name field.

Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area level or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.



(U) Ask User

System Use When only one location is defined, the System automatically displays the patients checked into the specified location. When multiple locations are defined, the System displays a list of locations and prompts for one to be selected. The System then displays the patients in the selected location.

NOTE: This subfield must be defined in order for patients to display.



(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to enter a location when this lookup type option is selected to identify a patient on the user side.



Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when a patient is identified using the visit location lookup type. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as all active inpatients.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Location(s) (Continued)



Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are linked to a provider in the Employee/ Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

No – Indicates the System does not display the physician assignment prompt.

Impact ofChange




Chapter 24

Interim Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe interim location lookup type is used primarily by medical records to create and display an alphabetical list of patient charts within a temporary department location. An electronic patient chart can be moved to or checked-in (that is, received) to a temporary location or area in the department. For example, in medical records, the patient chart can be moved through the various locations in the department, such as assembly, abstracting, and coding. Each location could be defined as an interim location for tracking the location of the chart. This option is only available for use with folder types that have the Folder Type Table, ^nt(“trf”), Miscellaneous Parameters level, Folder Category field, defined as patient.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Interim Location Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Interim Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Interim Location Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afa

Department Usage Medical RecordsMedical Records uses this lookup type to electronically move or receive a discharged patient’s chart to a temporary location in order to abstract information or process deficient information in the patient’s chart for insurance or other emergent reviews (Example: court hearings, subpoena).



DescriptionWhen this option is accessed, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Interim Location subfield of this table is defined. The Interim Location subfield can be defined as follows.

Location – Displays the Interim Location Screen listing the patients received into the defined location.

Terminal Location – Displays the Interim Location Screen listing the patients received into the location of the terminal being used.

Ask User – Prompts for a location to be identified (Example: assembly, abstracting, coding) or the Expand button can be clicked to define a location. Once a location is identified, the System displays the Interim Location Screen. Only those locations defined as chart locations in the Area Table, ^ afa, Lookup Flags field, Chart Location? subfield can be specified.

The Interim Location Screen displays the following information as shown below:

Folder Type – Displays as a heading bar on the Interim Location Screen. Folder types are defined in the Folder Type Table, ^nt(“trf”) as shown below.

Discharge Date – Displays the patient’s visit discharge date.







Employee – Displays the employee type who is making the chart request. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, ^aet("et"), and linked to an employee/provider in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

The following processing options are available from the Interim Location Screen:

Select patient – Allows a menu function or menu list to be accessed. A patient can be selected only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes.

Scan bar code – Allows the user to scan a bar code to identify a patient. This option displays only when the associated Patient Identification menu function, Visit Flags push parameter, Scanable PTID? field is defined as yes.

(M) Move – Allows a patient’s chart to be moved to another interim location. When this option is chosen, the System prompts for another interim location to be entered. Once a location is identified, the new location displays above the transaction line.



(R) Receive – Allows a patient’s chart to be received into this interim location. When this option is chosen, the System prompts for a patient to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to display an expand screen to identify the patient. When a patient is identified, the System prompts for a chart to be received at this location. The user can select the current request or choose (N) New, which allows a new request to be created. Once accepted, the patient’s chart location is updated to this interim location.

Goto – Causes the Interim Location Screen to close.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as interim location, which identifies patients by temporary department location.

Input Defining this subfield as interim location causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Interim LocationAllow Selection?Expand Screen

Required

System Use Displays the patient’s assigned to an interim location.

Impact ofChange


Interim Location

Purpose Defines the interim location into which the film/charts can be moved/received.

Input Interim location look-up name

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub-area level, Lookup Name(s) field.


(U) Ask User


Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Chart Location? subfield defined as yes.


System Use When only one location is defined, the System automatically displays the patient’s chart received into the specified location. When multiple locations are defined, the System displays a list of locations and prompts for one to be selected. The System then displays the patient’s chart in the selected location.



(T) Terminal Location – Displays the patient charts received into the location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

(U) Ask User – Indicates the System prompts the user to enter a location when this lookup type option is selected.

Impact ofChange




Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected to access another menu function or menu list.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected from the interim location list to access another menu function or menu list.

No – Indicates patients cannot be selected.

Impact ofChange


Expand Screen

Purpose Defines the Patient Identification Expand Screen that displays when the Expand button is clicked while identifying a patient using the (A) Add processing option. This expand screen allows other patient populations to be accessed or other patient identification methods to be used.


Links from the Patient Identification Expand Screen, ^rt(“id”)

System Use Displays the Expand processing option when the (A) Add button is clicked while identifying a patient using this lookup type.

Impact ofChange



Chapter 25

Current Location Lookup Type

OverviewThe current location lookup type is used to identify a patient checked into a temporary location (Example: Radiology, laboratory).

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Current Location Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Current Location Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Current Location Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afa

Department Usage Ancillary DepartmentsAncillary departments (Example: Radiology) use this lookup type to identify a patient checked into a temporary location. The patient’s location can be added or updated from the patient display when this lookup type option is selected.

Medical StaffPhysicians use this lookup type to identify a patient checked into a temporary location (Example: Surgery). The Physician can add or update a patient’s location from the patient display when this lookup type option is selected.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Location(s) subfield of this table is defined. Only those locations that have the Area Table, ^ afa, Area level, Sub-area or Sub-sub-area level, Lookup Flags field, Transport Location? subfield defined as yes can be specified.

The Location(s) subfield can be defined as follows:

Location – Displays the Current Location Screen listing the patients checked into the defined location as shown below.

Ask user – Prompts for a location to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to define the location. Once a location is identified, the System displays the Current Location Screen.

Terminal location – Displays the Current Location Screen listing the patients checked into the location of the terminal being used.

Once a location is identified, the Current Location Screen displays the following information as shown below:


Visit Number – Displays the visit number from the visit record. When the patient’s visit is pending and a number has not been assigned, this column is empty for that patient.

Current Loc – Displays the patient’s most recent check-in location other than the patient’s home location.

Date/Time In – Displays the date and time the patient was checked in to the current location.



Home Location – Displays the patient’s home location. When the patient does not have a home location (that is, unit number or bed number), the patient’s visit type and status display (Example: Active IP).

The following processing options can display for selection:

Select patient – Allows the patients assigned to this lookup type to be accessed. Displays only when the Data field, Allow Selection? subfield in this table is defined as yes.

(U) Update – Allows a patient's location to be updated. This processing option displays when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield is defined as yes. The following options are available:

Select patient – Allows the patient to be moved from the current location to a new location. The patient is removed from the old location and added to the new current location. When Expand is clicked, the System displays the transport locations defined in the Area Table, ^ afa, for selection.

Delete patient – Allows the patient to be removed from the current location. The System clears the patient's current location.

(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added to the current location. This processing option displays when the Data field, Allow Processing? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. When Expand is clicked, the System displays the Patient Identification Expand Screen. This screen allows other patient populations to be accessed or other patient groups to be selected.



Physician assignment prompt – Prompts the physician to assign him/herself to a patient once the patient is selected from the patient list. The prompt displays when the following conditions are true:


The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee Type(s) field.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as current location, which displays the patient(s) assigned to a temporary location.

Input Defining this subfield as current location causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

Location(s)Allow Selection?Allow Processing?Expand ScreenVisit Type/Status ListPhysician Assignment Prompt?

Required

System Use Displays the patients checked into a temporary location (Example: radiology).

Impact ofChange


Location(s)

Purpose Defines the current location that determines the patients who display during a patient search.



NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level, Area Name field.


(U) Ask User


Links from the Area Table, âfaNOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, âfa, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Transport Location? subfield defined as yes.(C) Currently Selected Location

System Use When only one location is defined, the System automatically displays the patients checked into the specified location. When multiple locations are defined, the System displays a list of locations and prompts for one to be selected. The System then displays the patients in the selected location.





(T) Terminal Location – Displays the patients in the current location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, ^ad, Location field.


Impact ofChange


Allow Selection?

Purpose Defines whether a patient can be selected to access another menu function or menu list.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Allows a patient to be selected to access another menu function or menu list.

No – Indicates a patient cannot be selected.

Impact ofChange


Allow Processing?

Purpose Defines whether a patient’s location can be added or updated from the Current Location Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to yes

System Use Yes – Indicates a patient's location can be added or updated from the patient display. Causes the following processing options to display on the Current Location Screen:

(U) Update – Allows a patient's location to be updated to the current location.

(A) Add – Allows a patient to be added to the current location. The patient's current location is updated to the specified location. When the patient is checked into another location, the patient is automatically checked out from that current location.

No – Indicates patients cannot be added or updated.

Impact ofChange


Expand Screen

Purpose Defines the Patient Identification Expand Screen that displays when the Expand button is clicked while identifying a patient using the (A) Add processing option. This expand screen allows other patient populations to be accessed or other patient identification methods to be used.


Links from the Patient Identification Expand Screen, ^rt(“id”)

Location(s) (Continued)



System Use Displays the Expand processing option when the (A) Add button is clicked while identifying a patient using this lookup type.

Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when a patient is identified using this lookup type. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as all active inpatients.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Expand Screen (Continued)



Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no



The physician has an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option. Employee types are defined for an employee in the Employee/ Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

No – Indicates the System does not prompt the physician to assign him/herself to the patient.

Impact ofChange




Chapter 26

Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type

OverviewThe physician alpha/time lookup type is used to display all scheduled appointments for the physician on the specified day. In addition, the physician can view inpatient, patient care provider (PCP) and follow-up lists.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("id"), Physician Alpha/Time Lookup Type:

Area Table, âfaEmployee/Provider Table, âeEmployee Type Table, âet(“et”)Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts, Cancel subfile

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments within a facility can use this lookup type to access patients who have an appointment with a specific physician.

ClinicA clinic uses this lookup type to access patients who have an appointment with a specific physician.



DescriptionWhen this lookup type option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined.


Specific physician – Displays the Physician Alpha/Time Screen for the specified provider as shown below.

Current User – Displays the Physician Alpha/Time Screen for the provider currently signed on to the System.

Terminal Default – Displays the Physician Alpha/Time Screen listing the patients assigned to the provider in the location of the terminal being used.

User Asked – Prompts for a provider to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the provider using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the Physician Alpha/Time Screen for that physician.

The Physician Alpha/Time Screen displays the following information:

Date – Displays the current date (access to other dates can be specified using the Goto button).

Arrival – Displays the arrival time of the patient in the physician’s office (that is, this time corresponds to the visit activation time).

PhysiciansPhysicians use this lookup type to access patients who have scheduled appointments. In addition, it provides the means to access other patient identification methods, such as the Follow-Up List Screen and visit type(s)/statuses, without going to other menu points.



Appt – Displays the appointment time for the patient (that is, this scheduled time of the procedure under the appointment type corresponds to the visit time). Patients are sorted in appointment time order.

Patient – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field. Patient names are truncated when necessary. The reason for the visit, from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Diagnosis data element, displays in dim text below the patient’s name as shown above.

Appt Type – Displays the procedure short name.

Action – Displays the number of action items for the patient. Action items are orders that require further action (Example: signature), results that require verification, or attestation deficiencies. Action items for general physician review queues are routed only to the responsible physician. When the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Order Comm System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Parameters Screen, Action Items To Attending At Discharge? field is defined as yes, outstanding action items for another order author are copied into the attending physician's review queue when the patient is discharged.



Remind – Displays the number of reminder items in the physician’s reminder list for the patient.

Review – Displays the number of review items for the patient. Review items are results that need to be reviewed by the physician. The review item count displays in bright reverse text when critical results exist. The review item count displays underlined when abnormal results exist for the patient.

The following processing options can display on the Physician Alpha/Time Screen:

Select patient – Allows another menu function or menu list for the patient to be accessed.

(G) Group – Displays the Patient List Screen for all the patients being seen by any member of the physician’s group, either on an attending or consulting basis. This processing option displays only when a group is defined for the physician in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Provider Group field.

(C) Coverage – Displays the patients assigned to the physician, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician.

(O) Other – Allows the physician to access other patients to whom he/she is assigned as an attending physician (that is, clinic patients/outpatients). When this processing option is chosen, the System displays the patient identification selection screen defined in the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Processor Expand Screen field. When a screen is not linked in the Physician Processor Expand Screen field, the expand screen defined in the associated Patient Identification menu function, Expand Screen field displays.

(L) Personal List – Displays the patients on the physician’s personal list. The personal list is a group of patients to whom the physician is not assigned, but would like to track. This processing option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Data Screen, Allow Phys. Personal List Processing? field is defined as yes. The manner in which the System displays the Patient List Screen (group list or personal list) depends on the definition of the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Likewise, the manner in which the System displays the list of patients (alpha or location order) depends on the definition of the Applications User Profile Table, âp, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Patient Display Default field.






(I) Inpatient List – Displays a list of inpatients to whom the physician is assigned and a summary of all new action, STAT/ASAP, and review items for each patient. The manner in which the System displays the Patient List Screen (group list or personal list) depends on the definition of the Applications User Profile Table, ^ap, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Physician Display Default field. Likewise, the manner in which the System displays the list of patients (alpha or location order) depends on the definition of the Applications User Profile Table, ^ap, Physician Profile subfile, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Patient Display Default field.

(A) Appointment List – Returns to the Physician Alpha/Time Screen from the personal list or inpatient list screen.

(A) Patient Appointment List – Returns to the Physician Alpha/Time Screen from the personal list or inpatient list screen.

(P) PCP List – Displays a list of primary care provider (PCP) options to select, if the physician can be more than one type, defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Care Providers data element. Once the PCP is select, the Patient List by Care Provider Screen displays patients to whom the physician is assigned as the primary care provider.

(F) Follow-Up List – Displays the Follow-Up List Screen listing patients to whom the physician is responsible. The physician can perform the following functions when the Data field, Physician Follow-Up Parameters subfield is defined with the following sub-subfields in this lookup type:

Allows a physician to perform a summary review of results from the Review Queue Options Screen when the Allow Summary Review Accept? sub-subfield is defined as yes in this lookup type. The System displays the summary review screen after a patient is identified.

Allows a physician to perform a summary sign/approve of orders from the Review Queue Options Screen when the Allow Summary Sign Accept? sub-subfield is defined as yes in this lookup type.

Allows a physician to perform queue counts and queue processing for all patients when the Use Patient Review Queues? sub-subfield is defined as yes. This process is dependent on whether the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Type level, Include In Clinic Review Queue? field is defined as yes.

Allows authorized personnel to view confidential visit records during patient identification when the Confidential Processing sub-subfield is defined in this lookup type.

Allows a physician (with security) to redirect queue items to another physician when the Redirect Employee Types sub-subfield is defined in this lookup type.

The System displays a list of employee types for selection who have security to redirect queue items to another physician when the Redirect Security Employee Types sub-subfield is defined in this lookup type.

When the care provider defined in the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type does not have an employee type defined in the Care Provider Relationship Table, ^rt(“cp”), Employee Type(s) field for a specific provider type, the System does not display any patients on the Patient List by Care Provider Screen.



The System displays the types of orders (discontinued or active and discontinued) for which a reject reason is required when the Require Reject Reason sub-subfield is defined in this lookup type.

When an order is rejected, the System displays an order rejection screen when the Order Reject Reason Screen sub-subfield is defined in this lookup type, linked from the Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts.

Goto – Allows the patients assigned to the physician for another day to be accessed.

Enter patient ID – Allows the user to access another menu list. The System can display one of the following patient populations when a patient identification is entered from the text-box prompt on the Physician Alpha/Time Screen:

Specified visit type/status – Indicates the System displays patients according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield of this lookup type. For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.

Access by consulting or attending physician – Indicates the System can prompt for a patient to be identified according to how the Data field, Patient Access Type subfield in this lookup type is defined. The Patient Access Type subfield can be defined as follows:

Allow all patient lookup – Allows all patients to display when a patient identification is entered at the text-box prompt.

No patient lookup – Does not display the patient identification prompt on the Physician Alpha/Time Screen.






Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required




Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as physician alpha/tim, which displays the scheduled appointments for the current day, for a specific physician.

Input Defining this subfield as physician alpha/time, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

PhysicianPatient Access TypeVisit Type/Status ListPTID Visit Type/Status ListPhysician Follow-Up Parameters

Required

System Use Displays the patients assigned to a specified physician.

Impact ofChange


Data (Continued)



Physician

Purpose Defines the physician for whom the patient appointments display when this lookup type is used.

Input Provider ID


Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âeEmployees display for selection beneath employee type headers. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, âet(“et”), and linked to a provider in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

An employee type must have an employee category linked to the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents subfile.

In order for a physician to be selected, the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician field must be defined as yes.


Expand

(C) Current User


(U) User Asked


System Use Provider ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified physician when this lookup type option is accessed.

Expand – Allows the physician to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. For a complete description of these methods, refer to Chapter 1, Employee/Provider Identification in the Employee/Provider Function Reference.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. An employee is considered a physician when the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field is defined as yes.

(T) Terminal Default – Displays the patients assigned to the physician in the location of the terminal being used. The terminal location is defined in the Device Table, âd, Location field.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts for a physician to be identified when this lookup type option is accessed. Only those employees who have the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field defined as yes can be identified.

Impact ofChange


Patient Access Type

Purpose Defines the patients who can be accessed by a consulting or attending physician.







System Use (A) Allow All Patient Lookup – Indicates all patients, regardless of whether the patient was previously assigned to the consulting or attending physician, can be accessed.


(P) Only Previous Assignments – Indicates the System invokes a recent assignment check and, when a partial name is entered, only those patients for which the physician has been assigned as an attending or consulting physician within the past year (365 days), or those patients who are currently assigned to the physician can be selected. All other patients who match the partial name are unavailable for selection. When a patient identification method other than a partial name is used (Example: visit number, social security number, and so on), a check is invoked to ensure the user had a previous assignment to the patient within the last year. When the check fails, an error message displays

Impact ofChange





Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Patient Access Type (Continued)



Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange






Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when the physician/provider enters a patient identification from the Physician Alpha/Time Screen. When a visit type(s) and status(s) is not defined in the Visit Type/Status List subfield, this subfield allows the physician to select other visit type(s) and status(s) options.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show



Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

System Use Displays a separate patient list for use when the user enters a patient identification at the transaction line on the Physician Alpha/Time Screen. When this subfield is not defined, only those patients with a visit type(s) and status(s) that match the Visit Type/Status List subfield are available for selection.

For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt from the Physician Alpha/Time Screen, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.


Impact ofChange


Physician Follow-Up Parameters

Purpose Defines the parameters for the (F) Follow-up List processing option on the initial display of the Physician Alpha/Time Screen.

Input Displays the following sub-subfields for definition:

Allow Summary Review Accept?Allow Summary Sign Accept?Use Patient Review Queues?Confidential ProcessingPhysician Queue




Redirect Employee TypesRedirect Security Employee TypesRequire Reject ReasonOrder Reject Reason Screen

System Use Collects information that defines the processing that can be done when a patient is selected from the follow-up list.

Impact ofChange


Allow Summary Review Accept?

Purpose Defines whether a physician can perform a summary review when reviewing the Review Queue Options Screen for a patient.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows the physician to perform a summary review when reviewing the summary review queue options.

No – Does not allow the physician to perform a summary review of results in this lookup type.

Impact ofChange


Allow Summary Sign Accept?

Purpose Defines whether a physician can perform a summary sign/approve of orders when reviewing the Review Queue Options Screen for a patient.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows the physician to perform a summary sign/approve when reviewing the Review Queue Options Screen.

No – Does not allow the physician to perform a summary sign/approve in this lookup type.

Impact ofChange


Use Patient Review Queues?

Purpose Defines whether a physician can access a patient queue from the Follow-up List Screen.

Input Auto-defined as yes

System Use Allows the physician to perform queue counts and queue processing for all patients when the patient’s visit type has the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Visit Type level, Include In Clinic Review Queue? field defined as yes.

Impact ofChange

Edits currently not available.

Physician Follow-Up Parameters (Continued)



Confidential Processing

Purpose Defines whether only authorized personnel can view patient and visit records when records are marked as confidential. Patient and visit records are considered confidential when the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Confidential Registration? data element or the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Flag, Confidential Visit data element is defined as yes. When patient and visit records are confidential, authorized personnel can access those records only by an exact patient name or visit number match.


None

Visit only

Registration only

Allow all confidential processing

Defaults to none

System Use None – Does not allow the user to access registration or visit records that are confidential.

Visit only – Allows the user to access all visit records, including confidential visit records, by performing a partial name search. Confidential visits display on the Visit History Screen only when confidential visit access is allowed. Does not allow access to confidential registration records.

Registration only – Allows the user to access all registration records, including confidential records, by performing a partial name search. Does not allow access to confidential visit records.

Allow all confidential processing – Allows the user to access all registration and visit records, including those that are defined as confidential, when performing a patient identification partial name search. Confidential visits display on the Visit History Screen only when confidential visit access is allowed.

Impact ofChange


Physician Queue

Currently not used

Redirect Employee Types

Purpose Defines the employee type(s) that determines the employees to which a physician can redirect the care of a patient.


Employee type partial name

Single selection

Links from the Employee Type Table, ^aet(“et”)NOTE: Only those options that have the Employee Type Table, ^aet(“et”), Facility(s) field defined for the facility in use display for selection.

System Use Determines the employees who display when a physician chooses to redirect the care of the patient to another employee.



Impact ofChange


Redirect Security Employee Types

Purpose Defines the employee type(s) that determines the employees who have security to redirect the care of a patient to another employee.


Employee type partial name

Multiple selection

Links from the Employee Type Table, ^aet(“et”)NOTE: Only those options that have the Employee Type Table, aet(“et”), Facility(s) field defined for the facility in use display for selection.

System Use Determines the employees who have security to redirect the care of a patient to another employee.

Impact ofChange


Require Reject Reason

Purpose Defines the types of orders for which a reject reason is required.

Input (D) DC’d

(A) Active And DC’d

Defaults to DC’d

System Use (D) DC’d – Requires a reject reason for discontinued orders.

(A) Active And DC’d – Requires a reject reason for all orders.

Impact ofChange


Order Reject Reason Screen

Purpose Defines the selection screen that displays when an order is rejected.


Links from the Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts, Cancel subfile

System Use Displays this reason screen when a physician chooses to reject an order.

Impact ofChange


Redirect Employee Types (Continued)


Chapter 27

Care Provider Lookup Type

OverviewThe care provider lookup type is used by physicians, case managers, office personnel, or social workers in a facility to identify the patients of a specified care provider.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Care Provider Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Care Provider Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Care Provider Lookup Type:

Employee/Provider Table, ^ae

Department Usage Case ManagementCase managers use this lookup type to access patients for a specific care provider.

Office PersonnelOffice personnel use this lookup type to access patients assigned to a specific care provider.

PhysiciansPhysicians use this lookup type to access their patients.

Social WorkersSocial workers use this lookup type to access patients assigned to them or to a specific care provider.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the System can perform one of the following:

Display a list of provider types – When the care provider defined in the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type has an employee type defined in the Care Provider Relationship Table, ^rt(“cp”), Employee Type(s) field for more than one provider type, the System displays the Care Provider Types Screen as shown below. Once a provider type is selected, the System displays the Patient List by Care Provider Screen as shown below. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, ^aet(“et”), and linked to an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

Display the patient list for the specified care provider – When the care provider defined in the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type has one employee type defined in the Care Provider Relationship Table, ^rt(“cp”), Employee Type(s) field for a specific provider type, the System displays the Patient List by Care Provider Screen.

Prompt for a provider name – When the Data field, Physician subfield is defined as ask user, the System prompts for a provider ID to be entered.

When the care provider defined in the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type does not have an employee type defined in the Care Provider Relationship Table, ^rt(“cp”), Employee Type(s) field for a specific provider type, the System does not display any patients on the Patient List by Care Provider Screen.



Patients can be assigned to a care provider during registration processing, in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Care Providers data element or through the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Usual Provider(s) field.

The provider for whom the list of provider types or patient list displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific provider – The System displays a list of provider types, if any, and prompts for one to be selected. Once a provider type is selected, the System displays the Patient List by Care Provider Screen for the defined provider according to provider type.

Current user – The System displays a list of provider types, if any, and prompts for one to be selected. Once a provider type is selected, the System displays the Patient List by Care Provider Screen for the provider currently signed on to the System according to provider type. The System allows any care provider to be defined, not only a physician.

Ask user – The System prompts for a provider ID to be entered or to click Expand to allow the care provider to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. When a provider is identified, the System displays a list of provider types and prompts for one to be selected. Once a provider type is selected, the System displays the Patient List by Care Provider Screen for the defined provider according to provider type. The System allows any care provider to be defined, not only a physician.



The Patient List by Care Provider Screen displays a list of patients assigned to the specified care provider, in alphabetical order according to the selected provider type. The following information is defined during registration/visit processing and can display on the Patient List by Care Provider Screen:

Patient NameMedical Record NumberPatient SexPatient BirthdatePatient AgeInsurance Plan



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange




Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Suppress Deceased?

Purpose Defines whether deceased patients display for selection when this lookup type is used.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Suppresses deceased patients from displaying for selection during a patient search (i.e., does not display deceased patients) when this lookup type is used.

No – Includes deceased patients on the list of identified patients during a patient search.

Impact ofChange


Physician

Purpose Defines the care provider for whom the patient list displays when this lookup type is used.

Input Provider ID


Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âe. Employees display for selection beneath employee type headers. Employee types are defined in the Employee Type Table, âet(“et”), and linked to an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

In order for physician to be selected, the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician field must be defined as yes.

NOTE: When the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Admit Privileges Status field is defined as an option other than full access or limited, the physician is unavailable for selection.

Expand

(C) Current User


(U) User Asked


System Use Displays the patients assigned to the specified care provider when this lookup type option is selected.

Expand – Allows the care provider to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. For a complete description of these methods, refer to Chapter 1, Employee/Provider Identification in the Employee/Provider Function Reference.

(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System. The System allows any care provider to be defined, not only a physician.

(T) Terminal Default – This option is currently not used.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts for a care provider to be identified when this lookup type option is selected. The System allows any care provider to be defined, not only a physician.

Impact ofChange



Chapter 28

Lifecare Visit Lookup Type

OverviewIn QuadraMed CPR, the System generates a lifecare visit for every patient during registration and visit processing. A lifecare visit is a visit that encompasses the encounters that a patient has with an enterprise and its care providers over the course of that patient’s life. In addition, the System provides the ability to document events in a patient’s chart without having to create a new visit. When a patient has contact with a care provider, outside of a visit to a facility, the System creates a lifecare visit that is similar to an historical visit. The lifecare visit does not display on the Visit History Screen. Each time a patient has a triage encounter through an enterprise’s Call Center, the System generates a lifecare visit for the patient. When a prescription is ordered, the System creates a lifecare visit and stores the prescription on that visit. The lifecare visit lookup type is used by care providers to access patients who have data stored in the lifecare visit. For example, a physician may need to sign a prescription order for a patient that is stored in the lifecare visit.

Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Lifecare Visit Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Lifecare Visit Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Lifecare Visit Lookup Type:

None

Department Usage All DepartmentsAll departments can use this lookup type to identify lifecare visit patients.



DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the System prompts for a patient to be identified. A patient can be identified using the following methods:

Name match – Allows a patient to be identified by an exact match or partial name match. For example, when the name Smith is entered, the System searches for all patients whose last name exactly matches Smith.

Soundex – Allows a patient to be identified by entering a sound-alike name. This process is known a soundex. When using soundex, a complete sound-alike of the last name must be entered. The System does not search for soundex partial names.

Gender/birthdate – Allows a patient to be identified by entering his/her full or partial last name, followed by a slash (/), and his/her gender (M, F, U) (Example: Smith/F). The System displays a list of patients in the database who have the specified last name and gender.

A patient can also be identified by entering his/her full or partial last name, followed by a slash (/), and his/her gender (M, F, U), another slash (/), and his/her birthdate (Example: Smi-/F/1960). The System displays a list of patients who have the specified last name, gender, and birthdate.

Number – Allows a patient to be identified by entering an identification number, such as the medical record number, visit number, secondary number, social security number, or prescription number. For complete information regarding patient identification methods, see Primary Lookup Type on page 396 in the Patient Identification XP Screen Table Reference.

The information that displays along with the patient name depends on how the Data field, Display Modifier subfield of this lookup type is defined. The following patient information can display:

Name – Displays the name of the patient. The format displayed depends on the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field.

Sex – Displays the sex of the patient as M=male, F=female, U=unknown. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier, primary care provider, or none.

Birthdate – Displays the date of birth of the patient.

Age – Displays the age of the patient based on the criteria defined in the System Parameter Table, ^ %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Max Age In Days and Max Age In Months fields. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier, primary care provider, or none.

he System always includes the unknown (U) sex in all gender searches. For example, when a U is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria, regardless of gender. When M is entered, the System displays all patients meeting the specified criteria and whose gender is male or unknown.



Secondary Identifier Information – Displays generic registration information for the patient. For example, the mother’s maiden name could be used to correctly identify a pediatric patient as shown below. The System displays the heading defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Header field. The information that displays under this heading is defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Link field. The Secondary Identifier Link field collects the Generic Registration Data Element Table, ^rt(“gr”), option that determines the data to display. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as secondary identifier.

In order for secondary identifier information to display for a patient, the following must be defined:

The field created from the specified Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), generic data element must be defined during registration processing.

The generic registration data element defined during patient registration must be linked to a Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), generic data element, Storage Reference Constants field, and that storage option (that is, a Generic Registration Data Element Table, ^rt(“gr”) data element), must be linked to the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Miscellaneous Parameters Screen, Secondary Identifier Link field.



City/State – Displays the patient's home city and state. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as address.

NOK Name – Displays the patient's next of kin. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as address. The next of kin name is defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Next of Kin Name data element.

NOK Rel – Displays the relationship of the next of kin to the patient. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as address. The next of kin relationship is defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Next of Kin Relationship data element.

Number – Displays the patient’s medical record number. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider, or none.

PCP (Primary Care Provider) – Displays the primary care provider (PCP) defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Patient Care Providers data element. Displays the short name of the patient's primary care provider. The primary care provider’s short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider.

Plan – Displays the insurance plan defined for the patient. The insurance plan is defined in the field created from the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt(“rs”), Insurance/Payor data element. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as primary care provider.

Visit Cnt – Displays the number of visits that have been created for the patient. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as none.

Stat – Displays the status of the patient. When the patient has an active visit, the two-letter visit type displays (Example: IP, OP, CP, and so on). When the patient is deceased, EXP displays. This information displays only when the Display Modifier subfield is defined as none.



Any Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), generic data element can be used; however, the System does not format any information entered into the field created from the generic data element.



Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Data





Required




Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This subfield should be defined as lifecare visit which displays the patient(s) with lifecare visits for the facility.

Input Defining this subfield as lifecare visit causes the Display Modifier subfield to display for definition

Required

System Use Displays the patients with lifecare visits for the facility.

Impact ofChange


Display Modifier

Purpose Defines the information that displays along with the patient’s name when a patient is identified using this lookup type.

Input (I) Secondary Identifier

(A) Address

(P) Primary Care Provider

(N) None

Defaults to none

System Use (I) Secondary Identifier – Displays the patient’s secondary identifier with the patient’s name.

(A) Address – Displays the patient's name, address, next of kin, and the next of kin relationship to the patient.

(P) Primary Care Provider – Displays the provider and insurance plan with the patient name.

(N) None – Displays standard visit and demographic information with the patient’s name.

Data (Continued)



Impact ofChange


Display Modifier (Continued)


Chapter 29

Physician Triage Level Lookup Type

OverviewThe physician triage level lookup type is used to display patients in the emergency room in order of their triage acuity level. A patient is triaged or classified during visit processing, according to the severity (that is, acuity) of the complaint. Triage acuity levels are defined in the Triage Acuity Table, ^rt(“ta”). They consist of classifications such as crisis, emergent, urgent, or non-urgent. Classifying patients according to triage acuity levels allows the physician to expedite treatment of patients in the emergency room.

The Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Triage Acuity data element creates a field that allows a user to define the triage acuity during visit processing. The System can automatically update the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Triage Acuity data element field when a triage assessment is performed using the Result Entry Profile Table, ^nt(“rp”), Triage data element.

Patients display on the Physician Triage Level Screen under triage acuity headers. The patients display in visit activation time order. This lookup type allows a provider to determine the patient(s) who has been waiting the longest. For example, two patients are in the emergency room with the same triage classification. Patient A arrived two hours ago, and Patient B has been there 30 minutes. Patient A will display on the list before Patient B because Patient A has been waiting for treatment longer.

The Triage Level Screen displays whenever this lookup type is accessed, and in the following places:

Physician Processor menu functionPatient Identification menu functionFor a management queue when the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue subfile, Sort Type field is defined as triage acuity.

In addition, this lookup type enables the physician to select a patient and assume responsibility for that patient’s care, reassign that patient to another physician, or sign out a patient.



Table Attributes

DescriptionWhen this option is selected to identify a patient, the initial screen that displays depends on how the Data field, Physician subfield of this lookup type is defined. The Physician subfield defines the physician for whom the patients display. The Physician subfield can be defined as follows:

Specific physician – Displays the Physician Triage Level Screen for the specified physician.

Current user – Displays the Physician Triage Level Screen for the physician currently signed on to the System.

User asked – Prompts for a physician to be identified, or the Expand button can be clicked to identify the physician using standard employee/provider methods. Once a physician is identified, the System displays the Physician Triage Level Screen for that physician.

When the Data field, Partial Name Search? subfield is defined as yes, the System prompts for a patient to be identified after a physician has been identified. The patients who display are limited to the patients being seen by the physician. Patient alias names do not display on the physician patient list.

Once a physician is identified, the System can be defined to display patients on the Physician Triage Level Screen according to the following criteria:

Table Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Triage Level Lookup Type:



Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt(“id”), Physician Triage Level Lookup Type:


Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt(“id”), Physician Triage Level Lookup Type:

Area Table, ^afaEmployee/Provider Table, ^ae

Department Usage Emergency Department PhysiciansPhysicians in an emergency room setting use this lookup type to access patients classified according to their triage level. The physician can select a patient and assume responsibility for that patient’s care, reassign that patient to another physician, or sign a patient out.



Visit location – Indicates the System displays patients for the specified physician who are assigned to the location defined in the Data field, Location subfield. The System displays only those patients who have the selected visit location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Visit Locations data element.

Specified visit type/status – Indicates the System displays patients for the specified physician according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, Visit Type/Status List subfield.

Only patients in beds – Indicates the System displays only patients for the specified physician who are checked into beds when the Data field, Only Patients In Beds? subfield is defined as yes.

The Physician Triage Level Screen displays the following information as shown below:

Triage Level – Displays the patient(s) under triage acuity headers (Example: Crisis, Emergent, etc). Patients who do not have a triage level defined display at the end of the list under Other.

Patient Name – Displays the name of the patient. The patient name displays using the delimiter defined in the System Parameter Table, ̂ %z, Utility Parameters subfile, System-specific level, Last/First Name Delimiter field.



CC (Chief Complaint) – Displays the free-text complaint entered during visit processing in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt(“vt”), Diagnosis data element.



Location – Displays the patient’s home location or visit type and status (Example: Active EP). Discharged patients display when the Data field, Discharge Display subfield is defined as all discharged visits or display discharged visits with queue entries only. Patients with lifecare visits and queue entries for the defined provider display when the Data field, Display Lifecare Patients? subfield is defined as yes.

Physician – Displays the short name of the patient’s current attending physician. The physician’s short name is defined in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Employee Short Name field.

Action – Displays the number of action items in the physician review queue for the patient. Action items are orders that require verification or attestation deficiencies.

Review – Displays the number of review items in the physician review queue for the patient.

The following processing options are available from the Physician Triage Level Screen:

Select patient – Allows the user to access a menu list. Once a patient is selected, the System prompts Are you taking responsibility for this patient? when the Data field, Physician Assignment Prompt? subfield of this lookup type is defined as yes. This prompt displays only when the following occur:



The System defaults to no at the prompt. When the user answers yes, the System places the physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function, Attending field and adds the patient to the physician’s list.





(G) Group – Displays the Patient List Screen for all the patients being seen by any member of the physician’s group, either on an attending or consulting basis. This processing option displays only when a group is defined for the physician in the Employee/Provider Table, ^ae, Employee-specific level, Provider Group field.

(C) Coverage – Displays the patients assigned to the physician, along with patients who are receiving temporary coverage from the physician.

(L) Personal List – Displays the patients on the physician’s personal list. The personal list is a group of patients to whom the physician is not assigned, but would like to track. This processing option displays only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Physician Data Screen, Allow Phys. Personal List Processing? field is defined as yes.

Print – Prints the physician census report(s) defined in the System Parameter Table, %z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Reg/ADT Reports and Message Definitions Screen, Physician Census Report field.

(S) Sign Out – Allows a physician to sign out a patient(s). Displays only those patients to whom the physician is assigned as an attending, consulting, resident, or additional responsible physician. The patients who are still active and for whom the physician is the attending physician are not available for selection. Once the physician selects the patients to sign out, the System removes the patient’s name from the physician’s assignment list and removes the physician’s name from the Provider Assignment Editor menu function for the patient. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield is defined as yes.

(N) Reassign – Allows a physician to reassign a patient(s) to another physician. Displays a list of patients to whom the physician is assigned. This processing option displays only when the Data field, Allow Sign Out/Reassign? subfield is defined as yes. The System prompts to select a patient to reassign or choose from the following processing options:

(A) Attending – Reassigns all patients for whom the physician is the attending to a new attending physician. Displays a list of physicians including the physicians who are in the same group as the user, additional responsible physicians, consultants, and/or residents. The System prompts to enter the identification of the physician to whom the selected patients are to be reassigned. The new physician can be identified using standard employee identification methods. The System changes the service (that is, the attending physician) for






each patient to whom the original physician is assigned. The System processes the patients at the same time, stepping the user through the assignment list. Once a new physician is identified, the System replaces the current physician’s name with the new physician’s name in the Provider Assignment Editor menu function.




Enter patient ID – Allows the user to access a menu list. The System can display one of the following patient populations when a patient identification is entered from the text-box prompt on the Physician Triage Level Screen:

Specified visit type/status – Indicates the System displays patients according to the visit type/status(es) defined in the Data field, PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield. For example, for an emergency room physician, the Visit Type/Status List field can be defined as Emergency/Active, and the PTID Visit Type/Status List subfield can be defined as Emergency/Discharged. When the physician enters a patient ID at the text-box prompt, the System displays the list of discharged emergency patients.

Access by consulting or attending physician – Indicates the System prompts for a patient identification from the Physician Triage Level Screen according to how the Data field, Patient Access Type subfield is defined. The Patient Access Type subfield can be defined as follows:

All patients – Allows all patients to be accessed regardless of a physician’s past assignment. Patients display when a patient identification is entered at the text-box prompt.

Previous assignments – Causes patients who have been previously assigned to the defined physician to display.

None – Does not display the patient identification prompt on the Physician Triage Level Screen.






Line Type


Input (H) Heading

(S) Subheading

(O) Option

Defaults to option

Required





Impact ofChange


Display Text


Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange




Data





Required


Impact ofChange




Input Free-text


Required


Impact ofChange


Primary Lookup Type

Purpose Defines the patient population that displays when this option is selected. This field should be defined as physician triage level, which displays the patients assigned to the defined physician based on the patient’s triage level.

Input Defining this subfield as physician triage level causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:

PhysicianDischarge DisplayLocationOnly Patients in Beds?Display Lifecare Patients?Partial Name Search?



Patient Access TypeVisit Type/Status ListPTID Visit Type/Status ListPhysician Assignment Prompt?Allow Signout/Reassign?

Required

System Use Displays a list of patients for the defined provider. Patients are sorted by triage acuity levels.

Impact ofChange


Physician


Input Provider ID


Single selection

Links from the Employee/Provider Table, âe. Employees display for selection beneath employee type headers. Employee Types are defined in the Employee Type Table, âet(“et”), and linked to an employee in the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Facility-specific level, Employee Type(s) field.

In order for physician to be selected, the following must occur:

The Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician field for the specified physician must be defined as yes.



Expand

(C) Current User


(U) User Asked


System Use Provider ID – Displays the patients assigned to the specified provider when this lookup type option is accessed.

Expand – Allows the care provider to be identified using standard employee/provider identification methods. For a complete description of these methods, refer to the Chapter 1, Employee/Provider Identification in the Employee/Provider Function Reference.




(C) Current User – Displays the patients assigned to the user signed on to the System, provided the user is a physician. Causes the Discharge Display subfield to display. Only those employees who meet the following criteria can be identified:

The physician has the Employee/Provider Table, âe, Employee-specific level, Physician? field is defined as yes.


(T) Terminal Default – This option is currently not used.

(U) User Asked – Indicates the System prompts for a care provider to be identified when this lookup type option is selected. Only those employees who meet the following criteria can be identified:


The employee must have an employee type defined in the Employee Type Category Table, âet(“etc”), Physicians and Residents employee type category option.

Impact ofChange


Discharge Display

Purpose Defines whether the System displays all discharged patients or only those discharged patients who have remaining queue entries. This subfield displays only when the Physician subfield is defined as current user and the Visit Type Status List field includes the discharged status.


all discharged visitsdisplay discharged visits with queue entries onlyDefaults to all discharged visits

System Use All discharged visits – Displays all discharged patients assigned to the physician whether or not they have entries in the review queue

Display discharged visits with queue entries only – Displays only those discharged patients assigned to the physician who have entries in the review queue.

Impact ofChange


Location


Input Location look-up name.

NOTE: Location names must be entered exactly as defined in the Area Table, âfa, Area Name field.

Expand

Single selection

Links from the Area Table, âfa, Area level, Sub-area level, or Sub-sub area level




NOTE: In order for the area option to be selected, the Area Table, ^afa, Area level, Sub-area level or Sub-sub area level option must have the Lookup Flags field, Visit Location? subfield defined as yes.


(U) Ask User


System Use Displays the patients assigned to the physician who are also checked into the specified visit location defined in this subfield. The System displays only those patients who have the selected location defined in the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Visit Locations data element.




Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays only the patients assigned to the physician who are checked into beds.

No – Indicates the System displays all the patients assigned to the physician whether they are checked into a bed.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no




System Use Yes – Displays the patients with queue entries for items stored on the patient’s lifecare visit (that is, a prescription order to sign) on the Physician Triage Level Screen. Lifecare visits display with a visit type of Active LV.

No – Indicates lifecare visit patients with queue entries do not display when this lookup type is used.

Impact ofChange




Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows patients to be identified by partial name search. Displays the Enter patient ID prompt instead of displaying the Physician Triage Screen.

No – Indicates patients cannot be identified by a partial name search. The System automatically displays the patients assigned to the physician.

Impact ofChange


Patient Access Type

Purpose Defines the patients who can be accessed by a consulting or attending physician.





System Use (A) Allow All Patient Lookup – Indicates all patients can be accessed, regardless of a physician’s past assignment.



Impact ofChange


Display Lifecare Patients? (Continued)




Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when a patient is identified using this lookup type. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed, such as all active inpatients.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show

Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA



Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

Required



Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines the visit type(s) and status(s) that determine the patients who can be accessed when a patient is identified at the Patient ID on the Physician Triage Level Screen text-box prompt. This definition allows a more specific subset of patients to be accessed.


Inpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Emergency

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Cancelled

No Show




Outpatient

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Clinic

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

Referral

Discharge

Short Stay

Pending

Active

Discharge

LOA

Interrupt

Preadmit

Cancelled

No Show

Home Health

Pending

Active

Discharge

Cancelled

No Show

(C) Clear

System Use Displays a secondary patient list according to the visit type/status(es) defined in this subfield when the user enters a patient identification from the text-box prompt on the Physician Triage Level Screen. When this subfield is not defined, the definitions in the Visit Type/Status List subfield are used.


Impact ofChange






Purpose Defines whether the System prompts the user for assignment when a patient not assigned to the defined physician is selected from the Physician Triage Level Screen.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Indicates the System displays an Are you taking responsibility for this patient? prompt once a patient not assigned to the defined physician is identified using this lookup type. The prompt displays only when the following occurs:




Impact ofChange



Purpose Defines whether the System allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign his/her patients during/at the end of a shift.

Input Yes/No

Defaults to no

System Use Yes – Allows the physician to sign out and/or reassign his/her patients during/at the end of a shift. Displays the following processing options on the Physician Triage Level Screen:

(S) Sign Out – Allows a physician to sign out a patient. Displays only those patients to whom the physician is assigned as an attending, consulting, resident, or additional responsible physician. The patients who are still active and for whom the physician is the attending physician are not available for selection.

(N) Reassign – Reassigns the physician’s patients to another physician in one of the following capacities:

Attending

Consulting


Resident

NOTE: The capacities must match the categories defined in the Employee Type Category Table, ^aet(“etc”). For example, the System does not allow a resident to be defined as an additional responsible physician.

No – Indicates the physician cannot sign out or reassign his/her patients.

Impact ofChange



Index of Selected Fields

AAlias Names(s) 5Allow Processing? 224, 303, 326, 365Allow Processing? (Continued) 196, 249, 263Allow Selection? 196, 224, 249, 263, 303, 357, 365Allow Selection? (Continued) 326Allow Signout/Reassign? 78, 132Allow Signout/Reassign? (Continued) 105Allow Summary Review Accept? 382Allow Summary Sign Accept? 382Allowable Visit Type(s) 168

CCheck Assignment? 39Confidential Processing 383

DData 6, 13, 27, 38, 70, 96, 123, 138, 146, 152, 159,

168, 194, 221, 245, 261, 299, 322, 332, 338, 346, 355, 363, 375, 389, 395, 406

Data (Continued) 51Default Barcode Input Type 42, 53Disable Coverage Edits? 79, 106Disable Coverage Edits? (Continued) 133Discharge Display 72, 99, 126Display Lifecare Patients? 74, 101, 128Display Modifier 41Display Text 6, 12, 26, 38, 50, 69, 96, 123, 138, 145,

152, 159, 167, 194, 220, 245, 261, 298, 322, 331, 338, 346, 355, 363, 375, 389, 395, 405

EEmployee 333Employee Types (Continued) 333Expand Screen 357, 365

HHome Locations 223, 302

IInsurance 224Insurance/Benefit Plans 247Insurances 248, 325Insurances (Continued) 302Inter-Fac Visit Processing? 42Interim Location 356

LLine Type 5, 12, 26, 37, 50, 69, 95, 122, 137, 145, 151,

158, 167, 193, 220, 244, 260, 298, 321, 331, 338, 345, 354, 362, 375, 388, 395, 405

List/Selected 222, 247, 301List/Selected (Continued) 324Location 13, 28, 73, 126Location (Continued) 99Location(s) 347, 364

MManagement Group/Queue 195, 222, 246, 262, 300,

323

OOnly Patients In Beds? 73, 127Only Patients In Beds? (Continued) 100Order Reject Reason Screen 384

PPartial Name Search? 74, 101, 128, 153, 154, 161, 196,

249, 264, 304Partial Name Search? (Continued) 139, 225Patient Access Type 75, 101, 128, 377Patient Screen Title 6, 13, 27, 38, 51, 70, 97, 123, 138,



146, 152, 159, 168, 194, 221, 245, 262, 299, 323, 332, 339, 346, 355, 363, 376, 389, 396, 406

Phys Assignment Prompt? 197, 225, 250, 264, 304, 327

Physician 97, 124, 377, 390Physician (Continued) 71Physician Assignment Prompt? 14, 163, 349, 367Physician Assignment Prompt? (Continued) 28Physician Follow-Up Parameters (Continued) 381Physician Queue 383Physician(s) 39Primary Lookup Type 6, 13, 38, 51, 70, 97, 124, 139,

146, 153, 160, 168, 195, 221, 246, 262, 299, 300, 323, 332, 339, 347, 356, 364, 376

Primary Lookup Type (Continued) 27PTID Visit Type/Status List 77, 103, 131, 380

RRedirect Employee Types 383Redirect Security Employee Types 384Religion 153Require Reject Reason 384Resident Service 160Resident Service Display 161Resource(s) 339Revision List iii

SSelection Name 4Service 139, 147Split Action Item Counts? 79, 106, 133Suppress Deceased? 39, 390

UUse Patient Review Queues? 382

VVisit Locations 325Visit Type/Status List 52, 102, 129, 140, 147, 154,

340, 348, 366, 378Visit Type/Status List (Continued) 75, 76, 161

WWork Queue 334

quadramed cpr patient identification expand … · quadramed® cpr patient identification expand...

Documents